Report FOR OFFICE USE ONLY—SITE ADDRESS:
This form is recognized by most building departments in the Tri-County area for transmitting information.
Please complete this form when submitting information for plan review responses and revisions.
This form and the information it provides helps the review process and response to your project.
City of Tigard • COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT
ill
=
RECEIVED
NOV 4 2015
CITY OF TIGARD
BUILDING DIVISION
PROJECT MANUAL
CRC HEALTH GROUP
OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT ]
GOP
City of Tigard
Aw roved Plans
B Date ___.
( C763 1/11
October 30, 2015 OFFICE COPY
HEALTH GROUP
Apo
CRAIG D. Cts
Project Address: 14.4
10763 SW Greenburg Road, Suite 100
Tigard, Oregon 97223 SALEM, OREGON
Architect's Project Number: (f)te �+ I �`
08015 r OF
PROJECT DIRECTORY
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT
• Building Owner:
Greenburgg Road Center, LLC
22020 17� Avenue SE, Suite 200
Bothell, Washington 98021
425 485-4850
Tenant(Project Owner):
Acadia Health Care, CTC Division
4 Sourwood Ridge Road
Black Mountain, North Carolina 28711
408 688-8086
General Contractor:
White Oak Construction
2455 River Road S
Salem, Oregon 97302
503 588-3081
Fax 503 588-3093
Architect:
Carlson Veit Architects P.C.
3095 River Road N
Salem, Oregon 97303
503 390-0281
Fax 503 390-2459
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers:
Sazan Group
111 SW Fifth Avenue, Suite 2120
Portland, Oregon 97204
503 416-2400
Fax 503 267-1701
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10-1
1 The following Specifications have been organized under the format of the Construction Specifications
2 Institute (CSI). Section numbers listed are for,identification, and may not be consecutive. The Contractor
3 shall check his copy of the Specifications against the Table of Contents to be sure his copy is complete.
4
5
6 Section No. Section Title Paqes
7
8 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING
9 No requirements
10
11 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
12 01 11 00 Summary of Work 2
13 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 1
14 Substitution Request Form 1
15 01 31 19 Project Meetings 2
16 Request for Information 1
17 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 2
18 01 42 00 References 3
19 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 3
20 01 60 00 Product Requirements 2
21 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 2
22 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management& Disposal 1
23 01 74 23 Cleaning 1
24 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 1
25 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 3
26 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds 1
27 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 2
28
29 DIVISION 02—EXISTING CONDITIONS
30 02 41 19 Minor Demolition 2
31
32 DIVISION 03-CONCRETE
33 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 2
34 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 4
35
36 DIVISION 04- MASONRY
37 No requirements
38
39 DIVISION 05 - METALS
40 No requirements
41
42 DIVISION 06—WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
43 06 05 73 Wood Treatment 2
44 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 3
45 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 2
46 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 4
47 06 65 00 Plastic Paneling 2
48
49 DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
50 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 2
51 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 2
52 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 3
53
54 DIVISION 08 -OPENINGS
55 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3
56 08 14 00 Wood Doors 2
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
TABLE OF CONTENTS • 00 01 10-2
1 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 3
2 08 71 00 Door Hardware 5
3 08 80 00 Glazing 4
4
5 DIVISION 09-FINISHES
6 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 4
7 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 3
8 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 3
9 09 68 00 Carpeting 3
10 09 90 00 Painting & Coating 6
11
12 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
13 10 14 00 Signage 2
14 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 2
15 10 80 00 Other Specialties 2
16
17 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
18 12 20 00 Window Blinds 1
19
20 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
21 22 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping 2
22 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 3
23 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping 7
24 22 10 06 Plumbing Piping Specialties 3
25 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 2
26 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 2
27
28 DIVISION 23—HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
29 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 2
30 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 2
31 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 2
32 23 33 00 Air Ducts Accessories 3
33 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 2
34 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 2
35 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units 2
36
37 DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL
38 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 5
39 26 05 19 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 4
40 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3
41 26 05 34 Conduit 5
42 26 05 37 Boxes 4
43 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 4
44 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 6
45 26 24 16 Panelboards 5
46 26 27 17 Equipment Wiring 2
47 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 4
48 26 28 18 Enclosed Switches 3
49 26 33 05 Battery Emergency Power Supply 2
50 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 4
51
52
53 END OF CONTENTS
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1
1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2 In general, the project comprises tenant improvements totaling approximately 5,692 sq. ft., in a portion of
3 an existing one-story building located at 10763 SW Greenburg Road, Tigard, Oregon.
4
5 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER
6 Concurrently with Work of this Contract:
7 Telephone and computer equipment installation
8 Security system and equipment installation
9 Furniture installation
10 Appliance installation
11
12 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR, IF ANY
13 Delivery:
14 By Owner.
15 Unloading:
16 By Owner.
17 Owner's Duties:
18 Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings.
19 Deliver product to site in accordance with approved construction schedule.
20 Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor.
21 Submit claims for transportation damage.
22 Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, missing, or otherwise unacceptable Items.
23 Arrange for manufacturer's required warranties, bond, service, and inspections.
24 Contractor's Duties:
25 Designate required delivery date for each Owner-furnished product.
26 Review any shop drawings, samples, and product data, and notify Architect about any anticipated
27 discrepancies or problems.
28 Promptly inspect delivered products, and report any damage, defective items, or missing items.
29 Handle at site, including uncrating and storing.
30 Protect products against damage and discoloration.
31 Install, connect, adjust, and where scheduled, finish products.
32 Clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products including those of other sections which
33 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by this work.
34
35 PROJECT OWNER'S (TENANT) PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE
36 The Tenant's representative during the project will be:
37 Sam Moore, Project Manager
38 Acadia Health Care, CTC Division
39 Black Mountain, North Carolina
40 408 688-8086
41
42 Allow access by the Project Representative to the project at all times.
43 Tenant's Project Representative will provide contract administration services throughout project. All
44 communications to the Tenant shall be through the Tenant's Project Representative.
45
46 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC
47 Provide barriers around equipment located on the ground.
48 Provide warning signs where necessary to alert pedestrians and vehicle operators to potential hazards.
49
50 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
51 Protect existing building, building contents, trees, shrubs, planting beds, pavement and other exterior
52 areas from damage.
53 Protect building occupants, pedestrians, building, and building contents from damage due to work of this
54 project.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2
1 Replace damaged property, where directed, at no additional cost to Owner.
2 Owner shall deduct the value of any damage from amount owed Contractor, or at Owner's option,
3 Contractor may pay for repair or replacement directly.
4
5 PROTECTING EXISTING UTILITIES
6 Drawings indicate approximate location of any known, concealed utility lines. Before starting work,
7 Contractor shall determine exact location of any of these lines that could be damaged by contract work.
8 Contractor shall assume that other, Unknown utility lines do exist, and Contractor shall proceed with
9 caution when working in areas that could conceal unknown utilities. If such utility lines are encountered,
10 immediately request disposition instructions from Architect.
11 If utility lines are damaged; remove, repair or replace lines as.directed. Additional compensation and/or
12 extensions of time, if any, caused by removing, repairing, or replacing lines will be determined in
13 accordance with the General Conditions.
14
15 PROJECT COORDINATION
16 General Contractor is responsible for overall coordination of trades. Mechanical and electrical contractors
17 are responsible for coordinating with each other and making provisions in their work for the other's trade.
18
19 CODES
20 All work shall be in compliance with current state and local codes. General Contractor shall make
21 available to all Sub-contractors, all reports and requirements issued by the building permit or subsequent
22 inspections by the building officials.
23
24 PERMITS AND FEES
25 The Owner will pay the plan review fee, general building permit fee and systems development charges.
26 The Contractor shall pay all other permit and use fees including, but not limited to: Specialty contractor
27 fees and permit costs; public works fees and permits; plumbing, mechanical, electrical and related permits
28 and fees; business license fees; permits and fees for work in public rights-of-way, temporary work, street
29 closures, and utility taps. The Contractor shall be responsible for violations of law for any cause in
30 connection with the completion of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obstruction or
31 damage to streets, sidewalks, utilities and other public or private improvements done in connection with
32 completion of the work. Conform to applicable state, city and local codes and ordinances.
33
34 UNACCEPTABLE EXISTING CONDITIONS
35 Exposed to View:
36 Repair or replace as part of this work.
37 No additional payment by Owner will be made.
38 Concealed:
39 Repair or replace where necessary.
40 Upon notification from Contractor, Owner will issue change order authorizing Contractor to perform this
41 work and contract sum will be adjusted accordingly.
42
43
44 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Contractor's requirements in the selection of products, manufacturers and procedures for consideration of
5 proposal substitutions.
6
7 QUALIFICATIONS
8 Architect will be sole judge of acceptability of any proposed substitution. Only approved substitutions may
9 be used on contract work.
10 Each request for substitution approval shall include:
11 Identity of product for which substitution is requested; include Specification page number.
12 Identity of substitution; include product description, drawings, photographs, performance and test
13 data, and any other information necessary for evaluation.
14 Quality comparison of proposed substitution with specified product.
15 Changes required in other work because of substitution.
16 Effect on construction Progress Schedule.
17 Cost comparison of proposed substitution with specified product.
18 Any required license fees or royalties.
19 Availability of maintenance service.
20 Source of replacement materials.
21
22 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BID PERIOD
23 No request for substitution approval will be considered unless written request, either paper copies in
24 triplicate, or .pdf files e-mailed to the Architect, have been submitted on standard form bound herein, and
25 have been received by Architect by 5:00 PM at least 10 calendar days prior to bid closing day.
26 Paper copies submitted without self-addressed and stamped envelope will not be individually
27 acknowledged.
28 Architect will issue Addenda prior to bid opening listing all approved substitutions.
29
30 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD
31 No request for substitution approval will be considered unless written request, either paper copies in
32 triplicate, or.pdf files e-mailed to the Architect, have been submitted on standard form bound herein.
33 Approval will be granted only when:
34 Specified product can not be delivered without project delay.
35 Specified product has been discontinued.
36 Specified product has been replaced by superior product.
37 Specified product can not be guaranteed as specified.
38 Specified product will not perform properly.
39 Specified product will not fit within designated space.
40 Specified product does not comply with governing codes or regulations.
41 Substitution will be clearly in Owner's interest.
42 Architect will issue Change Order authorizing approved substitutions and revising Contract Sum where
43 appropriate.
44
45
46 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
TO:
PROJECT:
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Page Paragraph Description
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test
data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposed substitution
requires for proper installation.
Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct:
1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and
3. construction costs caused by proposed substitution.
4. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty
requirements.
5. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution.
Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution
are equivalent or superior to specified item.
Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions
found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution.
Submitted by:
Name (Printed or typed) General Contractor (if after award of Contract)
Signature For use by NE
Firm Name ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as noted
Address El Not Approved ❑ Received too late
City, State, Zip By
Date Date
Tel: Fax: Remarks
July 1999
The Construction Specifications Institute
Northwest Region Owner(if after award of Contract)
Date
r Advancement
of Construction
Technology
PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1
1 SECTION INCLUDES
2 Pre-bid meeting, pre-construction meeting, pre-installation conferences, progress meetings, and Requests
3 for Information.
4
5 PRE-BID MEETING
6 Attendees:
7 General Contractor, Building Owner's Representatives, Subcontractors and Suppliers.
8 A written list of attendees will be prepared (sign-in sheet).
9 Agenda: •
10 Introduction of parties involved, review of scope of project, overview of project requirements, review of
11 project schedule, review of project budget, and questions from Attendees.
12 A walk-through of the existing building and project area will be conducted.
13 General Contractor will record meeting minutes and distribute minutes and copy of sign-in sheet. Copies
14 will be sent to other attendees upon request.
15
16 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
17 Meeting Requirements:
18 Building Owner, Project Owner, Architect, and General Contractor schedule date and time for a
19 Preconstruction Site Meeting as soon as possible after Contractor receives signed contract or Notice to
20 Proceed.
21 Attendees:
22 Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Consultants deemed necessary by Architect and Contractor.
23 Agenda:
24 Schedule Progress Meetings.
25 Discuss lines of communication and methods on how to reduce possible miscommunications between
26 parties involved. Reach conclusions and abide by them. Maintain communication and cooperation.
27 Discuss waste management plan and indoor air quality management plan.
28 Discuss hazardous materials.
29 Review list of subcontractors and suppliers.
30 Discuss Construction Progress Schedule and agree on date of publication.
31 Discuss critical scheduling requirements.
32 Discuss Contractor requirements.
33 Discuss Design-Build requirements if applicable.
34 Discuss procedures for Contractor's RFIs. Requirements as follows:
35 Contact Architect for items apparently requiring immediate attention.
36 If Contractor requires additional information, clarification, unforeseen conditions are encountered
37 or suggestions for betterment of project, document apparent item, provide a due date and indicate
38 whether additional time/cost or savings are involved and submit RFI on form at end of this
39 Section. Prepare each RFI for a single subject matter.
40 Record each RFI in a Log, identifying each RFI by number, subject, date submitted, date of
41 response and disposition.
42 Contractor may use his own RFI form or prepare RFI by copying or scanning form at end of this
43 Section. Number each RFI numerically and record in log. Architect answers RFIs in a timely
44 manner by written response on submitted RFI. If Change Order is indicated change order request
45 prepared and forwarded to Contractor.
46 Design ClarificationNerification Request(DCVR) or other forms are unacceptable.
47 Review procedures for processing shop drawings, product data, samples, field decisions, and change
48 orders.
49 Review procedures for maintaining project record documents, security, deliveries, safety, housekeeping,
50 and first aid.
51 Discuss procedures of work forces and working relations with Owner's staff and others.
52 Review use of site for parking, staging, temporary buildings and construction activities.
53 Schedule future meeting dates and times.
54
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2
1
2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
3 Meeting Requirements:
4 Conduct Pre-installation Conference before each activity that requires coordination with other construction
5 activities.
6 See each Specification Sections to verify if a pre-installation conference is required.
7 Attendees:
8 General Contractor, Subcontractor(s) involved, manufacturer's representative if required by manufacturer
9 and/or specifications. Code enforcement personnel if required by local codes.
10 Agenda:
11 Review progress of other activities and preparations for activity under consideration, including time
12 schedules, manufacturer's preparation and installation recommendations, safety requirements, weather
13 limitations, substrate acceptability, compatibility problems, and inspection and testing requirements.
14 Contractor conducts and records significant discussions, agreements and disagreements of each
15 conference. It is recommended that this meeting be held before or after Progress Meeting.
16 Number and record meetings sequentially. Distribute meeting record to concerned parties including
17 Architect, Building Owner and Project Owner within 72 hours after meeting.
18
19 PROGRESS MEETINGS
20 Meeting Requirements:
21 General Contractor conducts Progress Meetings at regularly scheduled intervals as determined.
22 General Contractor prepares agenda and provides meeting minutes.
23 Weekly meetings, or as scheduled, conducted atjobsite.
24 Attendees:
25 Project Owner, Building Owner, Architect, Contractor, Consultants and Subcontractors deemed necessary
26 by Architect and Contractor.
27 Agenda:
28 Review construction progress schedule.
29 Review last Meeting Minutes for accuracy. Correct items if needed.
30 Discuss old business and new business agenda items.
31 Review RFI log, change order requests, and submittal log for current status. •
32 General Contractor distributes written minutes of each meeting to concerned parties, as determined,
33 within 72 hours.
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
1 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
2
3 CARLSON VEIT ARCHITECTS P.C. RFI NO.:
4 3095 River Road North
5 Salem, Oregon 97303 DATE:
6 503 390-0281
7 FAX 503 390-2459
8
9 CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT NO.:
10
11 ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.: 08015
12
13 PROJECT: CRC Health Group-Office Tenant Improvement
14
15 OWNER: Acadia Health Care
16
17 TO:
18
19 INITIATED BY:
20
21 QUESTION:
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38 Potential Cost Impact:
39
40 Potential Time Impact:
41
42 Response needed within days
43
44 RESPONSE:
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59 Signature: Date:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples required by Contract Documents.
5
6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
7 Submittal Schedule:
8 Designate in Construction Schedule, or in separate coordinated schedule, submission dates and dates
9 that reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed.
10 Shop Drawings:
11 Identify Shop Drawing details by reference to drawing sheet, detail, schedule, or room number shown on
12 contract drawings.
13 Sheet Size 8 1/2 X 11 inch, or folded to that size to facilitate filing.
14 Product Data:
15 Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products.
16 Show performance characteristics and capacities.
17 Show dimensions and required clearance.
18 Show wiring and piping diagrams, and controls.
19 Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
20 Modify to delete information not applicable to work.
21 Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to work.
22 Samples:
23 Size and quantity: See respective specification sections.
24 Show full range of color, texture, and pattern.
25 Deliver to Architect's office, unless otherwise specified.
26
27 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
28 Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission.
29 Determine and verify:
30 Field measurements.
31 Field construction criteria.
32 Catalog numbers and similar data.
33 Conformance with specifications.
34 Comply with Contract Documents.
35 Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work.
36 Notify Architect in writing, at submission time, of any deviations in submittals from Contract Document
37 requirements.
38 Perform no work or fabrication requiring submittal until Architect approves submittal.
39
40 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
41 Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved Progress Schedule, and in such sequence as to
42 cause no work delay.
43 Number of submittals required:
44 Shop Drawings:
45 Submit sufficient opaque paper reproductions for Contractor's needs, plus two copies which will
46 be retained by Architect. Contractor may submit Shop Drawings to Architect by e-mail in .pdf
47 format in lieu of paper copies.
48 Product Data:
49 Submit sufficient paper copies for Contractor's needs, plus two copies which will be retained by
50 Architect. Contractor may submit Product Data to Architect by e-mail in .pdf format in lieu of
51 paper copies.
52 Samples:
53 Submit number stated in respective specification sections. Submittal shall contain:
54 Project title and names of Contractor, Supplier, and Manufacturer.
55 Project identification complete with specification section number.
56 Field measurements, clearly identified as such.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2
1 Relation to critical features and adjacent work.
2 Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specifications numbers.
3 Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
4 Identification of resubmittal revisions.
5 At least 6 X 8 inch space on each page for Contractor's and Architect's stamps.
6 Contractor's stamp, signed and certifying that products, field measurements, field construction
7 criteria, and information submitted has been reviewed and accepted by him as accurate and
8 conforming with Contract Documents.
9
10 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
11 Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit until approved.
12 Shop Drawings and Product Data:
13 Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.
14 Identify any changes made other than those requested by Architect.
15 Samples:
16 Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
17
18 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES
19 Review submittals with reasonable promptness.
20 Affix signature, and indicate approval or requirements for resubmittal.
21 Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or resubmission.
22
23 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
24 Refer to individual sections in this Project Manual.
25
26
27 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
REFERENCES 01 42 00-1
1 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
2 For products or workmanship specified by Referenced Specification or Standard, comply with
3 requirements of the Specification or Standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
4 required by governing codes.
5 Except where a specific date is specified, the date of Referenced Specification or Standard is that in effect
6 as of the date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
7 Obtain a copy of all Referenced Specifications and Standards, and maintain at jobsite during the specific
8 work until Substantial Completion of the Project.
9 Wherever referenced Standard Specifications or Standards issued by manufacturers or other similar
10 organizations contain provisions which conflict with the Contract Documents the Contract Documents shall
11 govern.
12
13 REFERENCED REGULATORY AGENCIES
14 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
15 Facilities
16 Office on the Americans with Disabilities Act
17 Civil Rights Division
18 U.S. Department of Justice
19 Washington, D.C. 20530
20 www.access-board.gov
21
22 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
23 444 North Capital Street, NW
24 Washington, D.0 20001
25 www.aashto.org
26
27 ANSI American National Standards Institute
28 1430 Broadway
29 New York, NY 10018
30 www.ansi.org
31
32 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers
33 1791 Tullie Circle NE
34 Atlanta, GA 30329
35 www.ashrae.org
36
37 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
38 1801 Alexander Bell Drive
39 Reston, VA 20191
40 www.asce.org
41
42 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
43 1916 Race Street
44 Philadelphia, PA 19103
45 www.astm.org
46
47 CS Commercial Standards of the Commodities Division of the
48 Department of Commerce
49 Washington, D.C. 20006
50 www.doc.gov
51
52 EPA Environmental Protection Agency
53 Ariel Rios Building
54 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
55 Washington, DC 20460
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
REFERENCES 01 42 00-2
1 www.epa.gov
2 .
3 Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications of the United States General Services Administration
4 Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WF SIS)
5 Washington Navy Yard, Building 197
6 Washington, D. C. 20407
7 www.apps.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fedspecs/iindex.cfm
8
9 FMG FM Global [formerly Factory Mutual (FM)]
10 1301 Atwood Avenue
11 P.O. Box 7500
12 Johnston, RI 02919
13 www.fmglobal.com
14
15 IBC International Building Code
16 Published by International Code Council (see ICC below)
17
18 ICBG International Conference of Building Officials
19 5360 Workman Mill Road
20 Whittier, CA 90601-2298
21
22 ICC International Code Council
23 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 708
24 Falls Church, VA 22041-3401
25 www.inticode.org
26
27 IMC International Mechanical Code
28 Published by International Code Council (see ICC above)
29
30 LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
31 U.S. Green Building Council
32 1015 18th Street NW, Suite 805
33 Washington, D.C. 20036
34 www.usgbc.org
35
36 NEC National Electric Code published by the
37 National Fire Protection Association
38 (See NFPA below)
39
40 NFPA National Fire Protection Association International
41 Battery March Park
42 Quincy, MA 02269
43 www.nfpa.org
44
45 OSHA Occupational and Safety Health Administration
46 U.S. Department of Labor
47 Occupational Safety & Health Administration
48 200 Constitution Avenue
49 Washington, D.C. 20210
50 www.osha.gov
51
52 OSSC 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code (based on the 2009 International Building
53 Code)
54 Building Codes Division
55 1535 Edgewater Street NW
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
REFERENCES 01 42 00-3
1 Salem, OR 97310
2 www.oregonbcd.org
3
4 PS Product Standards of the Commodities Division of the
5 Department of Commerce
6 Washington, D. C.
7 www.doc.gov
8
9 SMACNA Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
10 4201 Lafayette Center Drive
11 Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1219
12 www.smacna.org
13
14 UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
15 United States Architectural and Transportation Barriers
16 Compliance Board
17 1111 Eighteenth Street NW, Suite 501
18 Washington, D.C. 20036-3894
19 www.access-board.gov
20
21 UL Underwriter's Laboratories
22 333 Pfingston Road
23 Northbrook, Illinois 60062
24 www.ul.com
25
26 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council
27 1015 18th Street NW, Suite 805
28 Washington, D.C. 20036
29 www.usgbc.org
30
31 TRADE ASSOCIATION REFERENCES
32 See specific Specification Sections.
33
34
35 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Temporary utilities and miscellaneous temporary facilities required during construction.
5
6 JOB CONDITIONS
7 Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper
8 performance Of the work. Terminate use and removal of temporary facilities at earliest reasonable time
9 when no longer needed.
10 Comply with governing codes and regulations.
11 Pay required fees and easement assessments.
12 Enforce safe and sanitary practices.
13 Maintain clean facilities.
14 Prevent interference with Owner's normal use of his own facilities.
15 Prevent wasteful utility uses.
16 Should Owner occupy part of facility, Owner will pay his proportional utility cost.
17
18 PART 2- PRODUCTS
19
20 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
21 Materials and equipment may be new or used, but must be suitable and adequate in capacity for required
22 usage.
23
24 PART 3 -EXECUTION
25
26 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
27 General:
28 Establish procedures among subcontractors to prevent environmental harm (air pollution, water pollution,
29 soil erosion, excessive noise, excessive odors and similar problems).
30 Comply with environmental regulations.
31 Complete construction operations by methods that minimize pollution and contamination.
32 Noise:
33 Avoid construction operations that produce harmful noise levels. Restrict use of noisy equipment and
34 operations to hours that will have minimum affect on workers and neighboring buildings.
35 Dust Control:
36 Provide dust-tight enclosures and/or sprinkle with water where necessary to control dust.
37 Do not use enough water to cause flooding, icing, or contaminated runoff.
38 Protect existing return air duct systems against demolition dust by providing filter media across duct
39 openings. Replace dirty media with clean when necessary to protect systems.
40
41 TEMPORARY WATER
42 Mechanical contractor shall provide and maintain water for the following purposes:
43 Service standpipe equipped with sufficient 3/4 inch hydrants that any work Center can be reached
44 with 100 ft. extension hose. Each Contractor shall provide his own extension hoses.
45 Drinking water dispensed in single-service containers or sanitary fountains.
46 Maintain cool as practicable, clean and fresh.
47 Maintain adequate volume.
48 Protect against freezing.
49 Water, in quantities judged reasonable by Architect, will be furnished without charge by Owner.
50 Ascertain where water service is available, provide required connections, and extend system to work area.
51
52 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES
53 General Contractor shall provide at the rate of one fixture for each 40 workers.
54 Type: Comply with Building Code.
55 For enclosures accommodating more than one person, provide privacy screens for each toilet fixture.
56 If both men and women are working, provide separate facilities for each sex.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
• TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-2
1 Maintain sufficient light and ventilation.
2 Maintain each toilet with toilet tissue on suitable dispenser.
3 Remove temporary toilets and use building fixtures as soon as feasible.
4 Disinfect premises after removal and restore to specified condition.
5
6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
7 Provide sufficient enclosure to prevent infiltration of rainwater, wind and other elements, and prevent
8 undue heat loss from within enclosed area.
9
10 TEMPORARY BARRICADES
11 Provide all necessary to protect public against injury and protect project against damage and unauthorized
12 intrusion. •
13
14 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
15 Provide and maintain necessary facilities and equipment to safeguard project against fire damage.
16
17 TEMPORARY FENCING
18 Provide where required for security and to prevent entry by unauthorized persons, 6 ft. high galvanized
19 steel chain-link fencing.
20
21 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
22 Power:
23 Electrical Contractor shall provide and maintain structurally and electrically sound temporary power
24 distribution system as follows:
25 Sufficient 20 amp load centers that any work area can be reached with 100 foot extension cord.
26 Each Contractor shall provide his own grounded, UL approved extension cords.
27 Load centers shall include:
28 Weatherproof distribution boxes.
29 Circuit breakers for each outlet.
30 Equipment grounding continuity for entire system.
31 Power at proper voltage for:
32 Temporary field offices.
33 Temporary storage and construction buildings.
34 Temporary lighting and power.
35 Temporary heating and ventilating.
36 Pumping.
37 Testing and checking equipment.
38 Owner's facilities continuous operation during electrical services change over.
39 General Contractor and Subcontractors shall provide their own power and distribution system for field
40 welders and any other special power beyond that specified herein.
41 Lighting:
42 Provide and maintain temporary lighting as follows:
43 30 ft. candles measured 3 feet above floor in spaces during work. Energize permanent lighting
44 fixtures prior to painting, except where fixtures are mounted on walls or ceilings to be painted.
45 Maintain from 14 minutes prior to until 15 minutes past scheduled work hours. Maintain 5 ft
46 candles measured.3 feet above floor as necessary to prevent damage or injury. Maintain when
47 authorized Personnel are present. Provide light control switches at area entrances, or successive
48 areas, so personnel access to project can be through lighted areas.
49 Wiring:
50 Prevent conflict with General Construction.
51 Maintain cords clear of walkways and other heavy traffic areas.
52 Power Source:
53 Electricity, in quantities judged reasonable by Architect, will be furnished without charge by Owner.
54 Ascertain where electrical service is available, provide required connections, and extend system to work
55 area.
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-3
1 TEMPORARY EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
2 Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working
3 conditions and protection of products, to allow for tempory heating and maintenance of required ambient
4 temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
5 Provide access doors with self closing hardware.
6 Provide temporary roofing as required.
7 After work is started, Contractor shall provide a watertight roof enclosure at the end of each day's work.
8
9 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATING
10 Provide temporary heat and ventilation throughout enclosed construction areas to:
11 Facilitate work progress.
12 Protect work and products against dampness and cold.
13 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.
14 Provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for installation and curing of products.
15 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment.
16 Mechanical Contractor shall expedite work so permanent facilities will be structurally, mechanically, and
17 electrically sound throughout and ready to provide"temporary" service as soon as possible.
18 Operate no permanent heating, ventilating, or air conditioning equipment without Mechanical Engineer's
19 authorization that equipment is properly installed, has clean air filters, and is otherwise properly prepared.
20 Replace temporary air filters with new units and restore system to like-new condition immediately prior to
21 turning project over to Owner.
22 Temporary portable heaters, as may be required, shall be provided by General Contractor.
23 Continue temporary heating and ventilation until Owner occupies or finally accepts project, which ever the
24 sooner.
25 Maintain ventilated areas in clean condition to avoid undue circulation of dust and air-borne particles.
26 Minimum temperatures to be maintained:
27 Generally, 24 hours a day: 40° minimum.
28 Temperatures required for work of various trades: See technical specific specification sections.
29 Fuel costs for temporary heating shall be paid by General Contractor.
30
31 TEMPORARY VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION
32 General Contractor shall provide and pay costs for temporary stairs, ramps, personnel hoists, chutes, etc.,
33 required for execution of work of all trades. Subcontractors shall provide their own material hoists and
34 scaffolds.
35 Elevator:
36 Existing elevators may be used for vertical transportation.
37 Obtain permission from Building Owner for construction use of elevator.
38 Protect all surfaces of elevator from damage.
39 Provide temporary wall and floor covering.
40 Clean all elevator surfaces after removal of temporary covering. Remove dirt and debris from
41 construction operations that may be tracked into elevator.
42
43 VEHICLE PARKING AND MATERIAL STORAGE
44 Coordinate with City of Portland for use of right-of-way, streets, public sidewalks, or public parking spaces.
45 Pay for all required permits.
46
47 FACILITIES REMOVAL
48 Remove temporary facilities, at project completion, or sooner, if directed.
49 Repair damage, if any, resulting from temporary facilities.
50
51 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 General requirements for transportation, handling, storage and protection of materials and equipment.
5 Contractor's options in selection of products, manufacturers and procedures.
6
7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
8 Materials and Equipment incorporated into work shall:
9 Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
10 Comply with size, make, type, and quantity specified, unless otherwise approved in writing.
11 Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
12 Manufactured like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable.
13 Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, and by same manufacturer.
14 Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
15 Equipment shall comply with capacity, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified, unless
16 otherwise approved in writing.
17 Do not use Materials or Equipment for any purpose other than that for which designed or specified.
18
19 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
20 For products specified only by referenced standard, select any product meeting standard.
21 For products specified by naming several products, select any one complying with specifications.
22 For products specified by naming one or more products and "or accepted substitute," select any one
23 specified product or submit request for substitution as required below.
24
25 INAPPROPRIATE PRODUCTS AND METHODS
26 If Contractor believes that any specified product, method, or system is inappropriate for use he shall, if
27 possible, so notify Architect at least 5 working days prior to bid opening, and if not possible such notice
28 shall be given before performing work in question.
29 If notice of objection is not received within the specified time limits, it will be assumed by the Owner that
30 Contractor agrees that specified products, methods, and systems are not inappropriate for use on this
31 project.
32
33 SALVAGE MATERIAL
34 All salvageable material, if any,will remain the property of the Building Owner, unless otherwise noted or
35 released for the disposal by the Contractor.
36
37 NUMBER OF PRODUCTS REQUIRED
38 Wherever in Specifications a product is referred to in singular number, such reference shall include as
39 many such products as are shown on Drawings or are required to complete the work.
40
41 PRODUCTS LIST
42 Before Contractor's first request for payment, submit to Architect complete list of major products proposed
43 for use; include proprietary product names, Manufacturer's name, and installing Subcontractor's name.
44
45 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
46 Perform work in accord with Manufacturer's instructions.
47 Do not omit preparatory or installation procedures required by Manufacturer, unless specifically modified
48 or exempted by Contract Documents.
49 When Contract Documents require work to comply with Manufacturer's instructions, obtain and distribute
50 such instructions to parties performing work including two copies to Architect. Maintain one set at job site
51 during installation and until acceptance.
52 Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in
53 conformance with specified requirements.
54 Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with Manufacturer's instructions, consult Architect
55 for further instructions.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-2
1 Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
2
3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
4 Arrange product deliveries in accord with construction progress schedule; coordinate to avoid conflict with
5 work and site conditions.
6 Deliver products undamaged, in Manufacturer's original containers or packaging, and with legible
7 identifying labels intact.
8 Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure that products are properly protected and
9 undamaged.
10
11 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
12 Follow Manufacturer's instructions.
13. Maintain product identity labels legible and intact.
14 Store products subject to weather-damage in weathertight enclosures.
15 Maintain storage room temperature and humidity within ranges required by Manufacturer's instructions.
16 Maintain reasonable protection against product theft and vandalism.
17 Exterior Storage:
18 Store fabricated products above ground, on blocking or skids; prevent product damage and discoloration.
19 Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to
20 prevent condensation.
21 Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
22 Inspection of Stored Products:
23 Arrange storage to permit easy access for inspection.
24 Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained as specified and are
25 free from damage, discoloration, and deterioration.
26 Protection after Installation:
27 Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products against damage and
28 discoloration. Remove covering when no longer needed.
29
30
31 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Procedures and limitations for cutting, removing, replacing or refinishing products or materials after initial
5 installation of such products or materials.
6
7 EXTENT OF WORK
8 Perform all cutting, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete
9 work or to:
10 Make work fit properly together.
11 Uncover work for installation of ill-timed work.
12 Remove and replace defective work and work not conforming to Contract Documents.
13 Remove samples of installed work for testing.
14 Provide penetrations through non-structural surfaces for mechanical and electrical work.
15
16 SUBMITTALS
17 Submit written request for cutting approval to Architect well in advance of any cutting which affects:
18 Work of Owner
19 Structural value or integrity of any completed or existing work.
20 Waterproof value or integrity of any weather-exposed or moisture-resistant work.
21 Visual qualities of any sight-exposed work.
22 Request shall include:
23 Project identification.
24 Description of affected work.
25 Necessity for cutting, alteration, or excavation.
26 Effect on Owner's work.
27 Effect on structural or weatherproof integrity on completed or existing work.
28 Description of proposed work including:
29 Extent of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
30 Trades who will execute work.
31 Products proposed for use.
32 Extent of required refinishing.
33 Alternatives to cutting and patching.
34 Cost proposal, when applicable.
35 Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be performed.
36
37 PART 2-PRODUCTS
38
39 MATERIALS
40 Products similar to those specified elsewhere in this Prosect Manual:
41 Follow those specifications.
42 Other Products:
43 Follow Architect's instructions.
44
45 PART 3 - EXECUTION
46
47 EXISTING CONDITIONS
48 Inspect existing conditions and identify work subject to damage or movement caused by proposed cutting
49 and patching.
50 After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting products installation or performance. Report
51 unsatisfactory and questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect
52 provides further instructions.
53
54 PREPARATION
55 Maintain adequate temporary support necessary to assure structural integrity of affected work.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-2
1 Protect other portions of project work against damage and discoloration.
2 Protect work exposed by cutting against damage and discoloration.
3
4 PERFORMANCE
5 Provide proper surfaces for repairs.
6 Employ original installer or qualified contractor to perform cutting and patching for:
7 Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant surfaces.
8 Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
9 Restore cut or removed work with new products to provide work complete in accordance with Contract
10 Documents.
• 11 Fit work air-tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other surface penetrations.
12 Where patching occurs refinish entire surface to provide even finish to match adjacent work as follows:
13 Continuous Surfaces: Refinish to nearest intersection.
14 Assemblies: Refinish entire unit.
15
16 CUTTING STRUCTURAL FRAMING
17 Not permitted at any location, unless shown on Drawings or otherwise approved.
18
19 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
20 Including work of this section, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have
21 been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section. Remove debris from project site upon work
22 completion or sooner, if directed.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT& DISPOSAL 01 74 19-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Special procedures for waste recycling, and material and equipment recycling.
5
6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
7 Comply with governing codes, regulations, ordinances, and anti-pollution requirements.
8 Comply with Environmental Protection Agency standards for indoor air quality as they apply to this project.
9 Comply with State Department of Environmental Quality standards.
10
11 COORDINATION
12 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
13 Cooperate to maintain continuous operation of Owner's activities.
14
15 PART 2- PRODUCTS
16 Not used. •
17
18 PART 3- EXECUTION
19
20 WASTE RECYCLING
21 Recycle waste materials resulting from construction operations to the greatest extent possible unless
22 otherwise specified herein.
23 Deliver recyclable waste materials, or arrange for transportation to, a construction materials waste
24 recycling company or enterprise.
25 Provide designated on-site containers for disposal of recyclable and salvageable materials.
26 Instruct employees and subcontractors on proper sorting and disposal of recyclable materials.
27 Periodically remove recyclable materials from site.
28 Dispose of at Contractor's expense at appropriate recycling centers.
29 Maintain recycling area clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination and co-mingling of
30 materials.
31
32 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
33 Allow no debris to accumulate in buildings, or on grounds, streets, or walks.
34 Clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, adjacent property and surfaces which have been
35 soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this Section.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
CLEANING 01 74 23-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Cleaning and trash removal during work progress, and at work completion.
5
6 REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS
7 Comply with governing codes, regulations, ordinances, and anti-pollution requirements.
8
9 PART 2— PRODUCTS
10
11 CLEANING MATERIALS
12 Use only those which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.
13 Use only those recommended by Manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
14 Use only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
15
16 PART 3— EXECUTION
17
18 GENERAL
19 Follow cleaning material and surface manufacturer's instructions.
20
21 DURING CONSTRUCTION
22 Periodically clean to maintain work, site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste,
23 rubbish, and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.
24 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste, debris, and rubbish.
25 Periodically remove waste material, debris, and rubbish and legally dispose of away from project site.
26
27 DUST CONTROL
28 Clean interior surfaces prior to painting, and continue cleaning as needed until painting is complete.
29 Schedule cleaning so that resultant dust and contaminants will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces.
30
31 FINAL CLEANING
32 Remove waste, debris, and surplus material from project site.
33 Clean grounds as follows:
34 Paved Surfaces: Remove stains, spills, and foreign substances and sweep clean.
35 Other Surfaces: Rake clean.
36 In addition to debris removal and cleaning specified in other sections, clean exposed-to-view interior and
37 exterior surfaces.
38 Employ skilled workers to perform final cleaning.
39 Remove any temporary protection and labels not required to remain.
40 Remove grease, mastic, adhesive, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign matter from
41 sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces.
42 Wash and shine glazing, including mirrors.
43 Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
44 Vacuum carpet and similar soft materials.
45 Clean equipment surfaces; remove excess lubricants.
46 Clean and sanitize food service equipment and plumbing fixtures.
47 Ventilating system, if used during construction:
48 Permanent Filters: Clean
49 Disposable Filters: Replace
50 Clean Ducts, Blowers, and Coils: Clean
51 Clean light fixtures and lamps.
52 Remove waste, debris, and foreign matter from roofs and roof drainage system.
53 Maintain structure and components clean until substantial completion.
54
55
56 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Contract condition requirements and specified administrative procedures in closing out work.
5
6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
7 When Contractor considers work substantially complete, as defined in General Conditions, he shall submit
8 to the Architect:
9 Written notice that work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete.
10 List of items to be completed or corrected.
11 Architect will, as soon as possible thereafter, make inspection to determine completion status.
12 Should Architect determine that work is not substantially complete:
13 Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, giving reasons therefore.
14 Contractor shall remedy work deficiencies, and send second Notice of Substantial Completion to
15 Architect.
16 Architect will reinspect.
17 When Architect concurs that work is substantially complete, he will:
18 Prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion using AIA Form G704, accompanied with
19 Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected.
20 Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities
21 assigned to them in the Certificate.
22
23 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT
24 Project Record Documents, see Section 01 78 39.
25
26 INSTRUCTION
27 Instruct Owner or Owner's personnel in operations of all systems and equipment in accordance with
28 Section 01 78 83.
29
30 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS TO OWNER
31 Extra Materials: Verify and comply with each specification section for required extra stock of materials or
32 product.
33 Certificate of domestic water disinfection.
34 Owner's Operating and Maintenance Manual, see Section 01 78 83.
35 Contractor shall submit the following:
36 Contractor's Affidavit of Payments of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706.
37 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A including the following:
38 Consent of Contractor's Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707.
39 Contractor's Release of Waiver of Liens.
40 Separate releases or waivers of lien for Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others with lien
41 rights against Owner's Property, together with list of those parties.
42 Duly sign and execute all submittals before delivery to Architect.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of
5 Products furnished under Contract.
6 Prepare as specified herein and in other specification sections.
7 Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems.
8
9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10 Data preparation shall be done by personnel:
11 Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.
12 Completely familiar with requirements of this section.
13 Sufficiently skilled as technical writer to communicate essential data.
14 Sufficiently skilled as draftsman to competently prepare required drawings.
15
16 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
17 Prepare data in form of instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
18 Format:
19 Size: 8 1/2 X 11 inches.
20 Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typed.
21 Drawings:
22 Reinforce edges against tear-out.
23 Bind-in with text.
24 Fold larger drawings to match size of text pages.
25 Provide fly-leaf for each separate product.
26 Identify each fly-leaf with labeled tabs.
27 Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Operating and Maintenance Instructions,"
28 and list:
29 Project title
30 Identity of general subject matter contained in manual.
31
32 PART2-PRODUCTS
33
34 BINDERS
35 Commercial quality, three-ring type with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
36 When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.
37
38 MANUAL CONTENT, GENERAL
39 Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order.
40 List:
41 Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number.
42 Each product including name, address, and telephone number of:
43 Subcontractor or installer
44 Recommended maintenance contractor
45 Local source for replacement parts
46 Product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
47 Product Data:
48 Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product.
49 Annotate each sheet to:
50 Clearly identify product or part installed.
51 Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
52 Delete references to inapplicable data.
53 Drawings:
54 Supplement product data with drawings where necessary to clearly illustrate:
55 Relations of component parts
56 Control and flow diagrams
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2
1 Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
2 Written Text:
3 Provide where necessary to supplement Product Data and Drawings.
4 Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
5 Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
6 Warranties, Bonds, and Maintenance Contracts:
7 Provide copy of each.
8 Including the following:
9 Proper procedures in event of failure.
10 Instances which might affect validity or Warranties, Bonds, or Contract.
11
12 MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL MATERIALS AND FINISHES
13 Include the following Manufacturer's data:
14 Catalog number, size, composition.
15 Color and texture designations.
16 Required reordering information.
17 Recommended cleaning materials and methods.
18 Cautions against detrimental cleaning materials and methods.
19 Recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule.
20 Submit specified information as called for in each specification section.
21
22 MANUAL FOR WEATHER PROTECTION MATERIALS
23 Include the following Manufacturer's data:
24 Applicable manufacturing standards.
25 Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
26 Submit specified information as called for in each specification section.
27
28 MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
29 Include the following Manufacturer's data:
30 Description of unit and component parts including:
31 Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
32 Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
33 Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Operating
34 procedures including:
35 Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
36 Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
37 Summer and winter operating instructions.
38 Special operating instructions.
39 Maintenance procedures including:
40 Routine operations.
41 Trouble-shooting guide.
42 Disassembly, repair, and reassembly.
43 Alignment, adjusting, and checking.
44 Servicing and lubricating schedule, including recommended Lubricants.
45 Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
46 Control Systems operation sequences.
47 Parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams necessary for maintenance, including:
48 Life expectancy of parts subject to wear.
49 Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
50 As-installed control system diagrams.
51 Color-code legend, if any.
52 Valve Tag Number Chart, with location and function of each valve.
53 Submit specified information for the following:
54 Mechanical Equipment specified in Division 23.
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3
1 MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
2 Include the following Manufacturer's data:
3 Description of unit and component parts including:
4 Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
5 Performance curve, engineering data and tests.
6 Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
7 Panelboard circuit directories indicating:
8 Electrical service.
9 Controls.
10 Communications, if any.
11 As-installed wiring color-code legend, if any.
12 Operating procedures, including:
13 Routine and normal operating instructions.
14 Sequences required.
15 Special operating instructions.
16 Maintenance procedures, including:
17 Routine operations.
18 Trouble-shooting guide.
19 Disassembly, repair, and reassembly.
20 Adjustment and checking.
21 Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
22 Parts list, including current prices, and recommended spare parts to be maintained in storage.
23 Submit specified information for the following:
24 Electrical equipment specified in Divisions 23 and 26.
25
26 ADDITIONAL DATA
27 Prepare and include the following:
28 Additional data when need become apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel.
29 Additional data specified in'other sections of Specifications to be included.
30
31 PART 3 -EXECUTION
32
33 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
34 Submit, in final form, one copy of complete data within 15 days prior to final project.acceptance by Owner.
35
36 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL •
37 Prior to final acceptance, instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all
38 products, equipment, and systems.
39 Operating and Maintenance Manual shall constitute basis of instruction.
40 Submit training materials and instruction schedule for Architect's review and acceptance at least 30 days
41 prior to training session.
42 Training:
43 Location: At project site.
44 Review manual contents with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operations and
45 maintenance.
• 46
47
48 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1
1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
2 Compile specified warranties and bonds.
3 Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
4 Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
5
6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
7 Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective
8 Manufacturers, Suppliers, and Subcontractors.
9 Number of original signed copies required: Provide 1 for each volume of Owner's maintenance manual as
10 specified in Section 01 78 83.
11 Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence.
12 Provide complete information for each item:
13 Product or work item.
14 Firm, with name of principal. address and telephone number.
15 Beginning date of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
16 Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract.
17 Provide the following information for Owner's personnel:
18 Procedure in case of failure or malfunction.
19 Instances which affect warranty or bond validity.
20 Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number.
21
22 SUBMITTAL FORM
23 Punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder.
24 Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inches.
25 Fold larger sheets to fit into Binder.
26 Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS".
27 List:
28 Title of project.
29 Name of Contractor.
30
31 SUBMITTAL TIME
32 See Section 01 78 23.
33
34 SUBMITTAL LOCATION
35 Bind into Owner's maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 78 23.
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
39
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Procedures for Record Documents to be used throughout the execution of the work and at final
5 completion of the work.
6
7 SUBMITTAL
8 At Contract close-out deliver Record Documents to Architect for Owner.
9 Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
10 Project title.
11 Date.
12 Contractor's name and address.
13 Title and number of each Record Document.
14 Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
15
16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
17
18 REQUIRED DOCUMENTS
19 Maintain at project site for Owner one record copy of:
20 Contract Drawings and Specifications.
21 Addenda.
22 Change Orders and other Contract Modifications.
23 Field Orders and other written instructions.
24 Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
25 Field Test Reports.
26
27 REQUIRED DRAWINGS
28 Maintain one black-line or blue-line print of Contract Drawings as"work set", marking as required to record
29 all Contract changes.
30 Prior to submittal, transfer recorded information to reproducible tracing.
31 Contractor may retain "work-set"for his records.
32
33 PART 3 - EXECUTION
34
35 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
36 Store in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.
37 Provide files, shelving, and cabinets necessary to safely and securely store documents and samples.
38 Maintain documents clean, dry, legible, and in good order.
39 Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes.
40 Make documents available at all times for Architect's inspection.
41
42 RECORDING
43 Label each document"Project Record" in neat, large, printed letters.
44 Record information concurrently with construction progress.
45 Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
46 Drawings; legibly mark to record the following actual construction:
47 Depths of foundation elements in relation to first floor elevation.
48 Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and Appurtenances, referenced to
49 permanent surface improvements.
50 Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible
51 and accessible features of structure.
52 Field changes of dimensions and details.
53 Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
54 Details not shown on original Contract Drawings.
55 Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark to record the following:
56 Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product actually installed.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2
1 Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
2
3
4 END OF SECTION -
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
•
MINOR DEMOLITION 02 41 19-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Interior demolition such as removing partitions, doors, equipment, fixtures and components, identify and
5 cap utilities, clean up and preparation, temporary partitions.
6
7 SALVAGE
8 To Owner:
9 Verify salvage items with Building Owner.
10 To Contractor:
11 All other salvage becomes property of Contractor. Remove from site.
12
13 COORDINATION
14 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
15 Cooperate to maintain continuous operation of Owner's activities.
16
17 PART 2- PRODUCTS
18
19 PLASTIC SHEETING
20 Clear or translucent polyethylene sheets, minimum 6 mil thickness.
21
22 FILTER MEDIA
23 Fiberglass, 8 inch minimum thickness, or accepted substitute.
24
25 WHEELING EQUIPMENT
26 Use only pneumatic-tired equipment.
27
28 PART 3 -EXECUTION
29
30 EXAMINATION
31 Verify that area to be demolished is vacant and not in use.
32 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
33
34 PREPARATION
35 General:
36 Arrange for, and verify utility service termination including capping active lines.
37 . Remove Salvage and store where directed.
38 Protect existing portions which are to remain against damage and discoloration.
39 Allow no leaks, even temporary, in existing building.
40 Barriers, Safety Guards, and Warning Lights:
41 Provide where necessary for public protection.
42 Utilities:
43 Keep active utilities intact and in continuous operation.
44 Party Walls:
45 Exercise extreme care not to damage party walls and adjacent construction.
46
47 DUST CURTAINS
48 Construct of plastic sheeting.
49 Provide where necessary or where directed to prevent dust-spread.
50 Install continuously from floor to ceiling.
51 Fasten to existing construction in such a manner to prevent sagging and accidental damage or removal.
52 Do not damage existing construction to remain.
53 Cover joints with tape.
54 Provide temporary supports for sheeting as required.
55 Maintain dust-proof; remove only when no longer needed.
56 Provide access and egress curtains as required to maintain fire escape routes.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
MINOR DEMOLITION 02 41 19-2
1 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
2 Allow no debris to accumulate in buildings, or on grounds, streets, or walks.
3 Haul away from site as soon as removed. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
4 Dispose of at Contractor's expense.
5 Clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, adjacent property and surfaces which have been
6 soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
7
8 PROTECTION
9 Protect work specified herein against damage and discoloration.
10 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
11
12
13
14 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CONCRETE FORMING 03 11 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Permanent and temporary formwork and accessories for placing of structural and architectural cast-in-
5 place concrete.
6
7 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
8 Build in as directed by those Contractors, without weakening or defacing formwork.
9
10 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
11 Formwork design and engineering, as well as construction are Contractor's responsibility.
12
13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
14 Protect against damage and discoloration.
15
16 COORDINATION
17 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
18
19 PART 2-PRODUCTS
20
21 PLANK FORMS
22 Douglas fir or hemlock, S4S, green, with no loose knots or knot holes; maximum knot size 1-1/2 inch and
23 well scattered.
24 Size as required to support concrete at rate poured.
25 Provide at footing and flatwork perimeters, unless otherwise indicated.
26
27 FORM TREATMENT
28 For Plank Forms:
29 Clean water.
30
31 PART 3 -EXECUTION
32
33 PREPARATION
34 Conform to shapes, lines, and dimensions shown on Drawings.
35 Brace and tie together to insure that position and shape are maintained.
36 Make tight to prevent mortar leakage.
37 Arrange joints as indicated or directed.
38 Form for surface indentations, as shown on Drawings, if any.
39 Anchor as required to prevent upward or lateral formwork movement during concrete placement.
40
41 BRACING
42 Provide as required to meet load requirements.
43 Protect against undermining or settlement when placed on ground.
44 Anchor as required to prevent upward or lateral formwork movement during concrete placement.
45
46 TREATMENT OF FORMS
47 Plank Forms:
48 Keep wet previous to placing concrete; wet thoroughly just before concrete placing.
49
50 TOLERANCES
51 Variation from level:
52 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
53 3/16 inch in any bay or20 ft. maximum.
54 3/8 inch in 40 ft. or more.
55 Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CONCRETE FORMING 03 11 00-2
1 Minus 1/8 inch; plus 1/4 inch.
2 Variation in Surface Tolerance:
3 1/8 inch in any 10 ft. measured with 10 ft. straight-edge.
4 Deflection of Form Facing Material between Supports:
5 0.0025 x span, maximum.
6
7 ADJUSTMENTS
8 Reposition to true alignment prior to, during, and after concrete placement, if necessary.
9 During concrete placement, in areas where formwork develops weakness, settlement or distortion, stop
10 placement and remove or strengthen formwork.
11
12 FORM CLEANING
13 . Remove debris and foreign matter from formwork prior to concrete placement.
14 Remove loose rust and foreign matter from reusable hardware prior to installation into formwork.
15
16 FORM REMOVAL
17 Leave forms and shoring in place until concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely support own
18 weight and imposed loads.
19 Remove forms at time and in manner to insure safety of structure, and without concrete surface damage.
20
21 FORM RE-USE
22 Withdraw projecting nails; clean concrete from contact surfaces. Replace with new material when
23 necessary or when directed.
24 Re-use forms only when contact surfaces equal those specified for original use.
25
26 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
27 Remove formwork and debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
28 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
29 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
30
31 PROTECTION
32 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section
33
34
35 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Cast-in-place or in-situ concrete for structural building frame, slabs on fill or grade, and other concrete
5 components associated with the construction.
6
7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
8 Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
9 Obtain materials from same source throughout the work.
10
11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
12 Protect against deterioration, foreign matter intrusion, contamination, and dampness.
13 Conform to ASTM C 94.
14
15 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
16 Cold Weather:
17 Place no concrete on frozen subgrade.
18 Remove ice and snow from reinforcing, forms, and embedded items.
19 Raise temperature of all surfaces in contact with concrete above freezing prior to concrete placement.
20 Minimum concrete temperature during placement: 65°F.
21 Minimum concrete temperature for 72 hours after placement: 55°F.
22 Maximum air temperature drop during first 24 hours after protection removal: 55°F.
23 Use of salts or chemical admixtures to prevent concrete freezing prohibited.
24 Do not permit temporary heaters to locally over-heat or over-dry concrete.
25 Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected frozen concrete.
26 Remove and replace freeze-damaged concrete at contractor's expense.
27 Warm Weather:
28 When air temperature exceeds 90°F and when wind exceeds 20 mph place concrete in accordance with
29 the following requirement:
30 Maximum concrete temperature at time of placement 75°F.
31 Mix concrete minimum possible time, and place as soon as possible thereafter.
32 Sprinkle forms, reinforcing, embedded items, and subgrade with cool water immediately prior to concrete
33 placement.
34 Protect unstripped formwork and exposed concrete surfaces against excessive drying with water spray, or
35 other approved method.
36 Assume responsibility, including costs, for testing suspected damaged concrete.
37 Remove and replace damaged concrete at contractor's expense.
38
39
40 COORDINATION
41 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
44
45 PORTLAND CEMENT
46 ASTM C 150, Type 1.
47 Use one brand only for exposed concrete.
48
49 AGGREGATE
50 Conform to ASTM C 33.
51 Maximum size: 3/4 inch, and not more than one-fifth of narrowest space between forms, one-third of slab
52 *depths, nor three-fourths of minimum clear space between reinforcing bars.
53 Use same source for course and fine aggregate used in exposed concrete.
54 Minimum 60% of surface of course aggregate to have crushed faces.
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2
1
2 ENTRAINED AIR
3 ASTM C 260, non-toxic after 30 days, not containing chloride.
4 Provide in exterior curbs, walks, and flatwork that are subject to freezing while wet.
5
6 CALCIUM CHLORIDE
7 Not approved for use.
8
9 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
10 P.R.C.#89, or accepted substitute; 3/8 inch thick, conforming to ASTM D 1751.
11 Depth as required to bring top to within 1/4 inch of surface of slab.
12
13 FLOOR FILLER
14 Dowman "Fix-All", or accepted substitute.
15 Provide over concrete floor slabs which are too rough or uneven to provide satisfactory base for resilient
16 covering or carpeting.
17
18 CURING AND HARDENING COMPOUNDS
19 Interior Flatwork to receive Finish Covering:
20 Clear, colorless, with fugitive dye, approved by covering contractor; meet or exceed ASTM C 309, Type 1.
21 Exterior Flatwork:
22 Non-yellowing, resin cure, water-based, meet or exceed ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A and B; Tamms
23 "Horncure WB 100", Dayton Superior"Day-Chem Rez Cure J-11-W', BASF "Master Cure 100", W.R.
24 Meadows "1100 Clear", Euclid "Kurex VOX", or accepted substitute.
25
26 OTHER INGREDIENTS
27 Conform to Building Code.
28
29 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
30 General:
31 Conform to ACI Code 318-02.
32 Concrete Strength and Minimum Cement Content:
33 Slabs-on-grade: fc= 3500 psi, fcr=4700 psi, max w/c ratio= 0.42, min. Cement= 6 sks./cy,
34 All other: fc= 3000 psi, fcr=4200 psi, max w/c ratio= 0.59, min. Cement= 5.5 sks./cy
35 Note: One sack of cement equals 94 lbs.
36 Air Entrainment
37 Footings—2% to 4% of concrete volume; walls, exterior slabs-4% to 6% of concrete volume.
38 Concrete Slump:
39 Minimum: 2 inches.
40 Maximum: 4 inches.
41 Verify that design mix test results reflect the slumps to be used.
42
43 PART 3- EXECUTION
44
45 EXISTING CONDITIONS
46 Verify that formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items are accurately and securely placed, clean,
47 water and frost-free, and ready to receive concrete.
48 Verify that vapor retarder is not punctured or otherwise damaged. Repair all damage.
49 Remove water from vapor retarder with portable high-speed air blowers just prior to slab-on-grade pour.
50 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
51 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
52
53 SURFACE PREPARATION
54 Remove foreign matter from surfaces and areas to receive concrete.
55 If vapor retarder is wet, blow water off with power blower.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3
1 Sprinkle subgrades and other porous surfaces with water to eliminate suction.
2 Install slab-on-grade screeds without penetrating vapor retarder.
3 PLACING
4 Convey and place by methods which will prevent material separation and loss.
5 Deposit continuously, or in layers that will not form seams or weakened planes; where seams or
6 weakened planes are unavoidable provide construction joints as specified hereunder.
7 Do not convey pneumatically placed concrete through aluminum pipe.
8 Do not retemper or use set concrete.
9 Maximum height of vertical drop without use of trunk, placement ports in sides of formwork, or other
10 approved method is five (5)feet. When under-water concrete placement is approved, deposit fresh
11 concrete into mass of previously placed concrete causing water to be displaced with minimum concrete
12 surface disturbance.
13
14 COMPACTION
15 Employ mechanical high frequency vibrators to consolidate concrete around reinforcement, into corners
16 and angles of forms, and to exclude rock pockets, air bubbles, and honey comb.
17 Hold vibrator in one spot no longer than 30 seconds; keep in constant motion, insert and withdraw at
18 points approximately 18 inches on center.
19 Maintain vibrator in vertical position when penetrating concrete.
20 Transporting concrete with vibrator not permitted.
21 Maintain spare vibrator at jobsite during concrete placement.
22
23 CURING
24 Treat with curing compound applied immediately after slabs are finished in accordance with
25 manufacturer's directions.
26
27 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN FLATWORK
28 General:
29 Form to true, straight lines, with slabs flush at joints.
30 Do not extend reinforcement through joints, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
31 Key adjacent joints.
32 Spacing:
33 At Exterior Flatwork:
34 Maximum spacing, unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
35 At Walks and Drives: 15 ft. apart, both ways.
36 At Curbs: 30 ft. apart.
37 Fill alternate joints and joints where flatwork abuts vertical construction with expansion joint filler.
38
39 CRACK CONTROL JOINTS IN FLATWORK
40 General:
41 Form to true, straight lines, with slabs flush at joints.
42 Spacing:
43 At Exterior Flatwork:
44 Maximum spacing, unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
45 At Walks and Drives: 15 ft. apart, both ways.
46 At Curbs: 30 ft. apart.
47
48 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES
49 General:
50 Screed all slabs, for whatever finish, to true levels.or slopes.
51 Non-Slip Finish:
52 Screed and tamp to bring fine particles to surface.
53 Float with wood or carpet float to true surfaces.
54 Slightly roughen surfaces with hair broom before tooling edges.
55 Mark off slabs as shown or directed; round edges to 1/4 inch radius.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4
1 Provide at exterior walks unless otherwise indicated.
2 Troweling:
3 Double trowel by hand or machine to hard, dense surface, free from trowel marks.
4 Do not absorb wet spots with Neat cement or mixture of cement and sand.
5 Wait until surfaces are dry enough for proper troweling.
6 Chemical dryers not permitted.
7 Trowel floors level to true slopes.
8 Provide at all concrete slabs unless otherwise noted.
9
10 FLOOR FILLER
11 Prime floor with asphalt emulsion prior to filler application.
12 Mix filler with asphalt emulsion as required to improve bond.
13
14 TOLERANCES
15 Troweled Surfaces: True within 1/8 inch per 10 ft.
16 Non-Slip Surfaces: True within 1/4 inch per 10 ft.
17 All Other Surfaces: True within 1/4 inch per 2 ft.
18
19 DEFECTIVE WORK
20 Remove and replace, when directed by Architect, loose topping, surfaces which show excessive cracks,
21 any slabs which do not drain properly, and other defective concrete. On surfaces scheduled to receive
22 floor coverings remove, by grinding if necessary, defects of magnitude to show through covering.
23 Remove honeycombed and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. If chipping is necessary,
24 shape edges perpendicular to surface or slightly undercut.
25 Feathered edges not permitted.
26 .
27 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
28 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
29 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
30 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
31
32 PROTECTION
33 Protect work specified herein against damage and discoloration.
34 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
35
36
37
38 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
WOOD TREATMENT 06 05 73-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Treatment of wood products to increase their durability against decay or retard burning characteristics.
5
6 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
7 Deliver to General Contractor sufficient preservative solution for field-cut treatments.
8
9 REFERENCES
10 Pressure Treatments specified hereunder refer to quality mark designations of American Wood Protection
11 Association, P.O. Box 361784, Birmingham, Alabama 35236-1784, and hereinafter referred to as AWPB.
12 Specifications may be obtained from Association.
13
14 SUBMITTALS
15 Certification:
16 Indicate moisture content of treated wood, chemical used, and retention obtained.
17
18 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
19 Protect against damage, moisture, and discoloration.
20
21 EXTRA MATERIAL
22 Deliver to General Contractor sufficient brush treatment material for field-cut treatments.
23
24 COORDINATION
25 Protect other work against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
26
27 PART 2- PRODUCTS
28
29 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
30 Provide AWPA, Standard P5, Use Standard UC4A, Copper Azole—Type B (CA-B) treatment using CA-B
31 dissolved in a solution of ethanolamine in water for wood preservative in the following locations:
32 In contact with concrete, roofing, and elsewhere shown on drawings.
33 Minimum Retention:
34 Above Ground: 0.10 pcf CA-B.
35 Ground or Fresh Water Contact: 0.21 pcf CA-B.
36
37 BRUSH TREATMENT MATERIAL
38 Material: Recommended by preservative treatment manufacturer for application to field cut treated
39 lumber.
40 Treat any field cuts to pressure-treated wood.
41
42 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
43 Treatment Chemical: Free of halogens, sulfates, and ammonium phosphate; Lonza "Dricon FR"or
44 accepted substitute.
45 Manufacturing Standard: AWPA C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood.
46 Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum smoke developed 450; flame spread 25 when tested per
47 ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.
48 Wood Moisture Content: Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and
49 15%for plywood.
50
51 PART 3- EXECUTION
52
53 EXAMINATION
54 Verify that material to receive treatment does not exceed moisture content specified for similar untreated
55 wood.
56 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of conditions requiring correction.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
WOOD TREATMENT 06 05 73-2
1 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
2
3 APPLICATION - PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD
4 Follow referenced specifications.
5 Incise members prior to treatment.
6 Apply 2 liberal coats of brush treatment material to field cut surfaces.
7
8 INSTALLATION —FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD
9 Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated wood. Only end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts are permitted
10 unless the material carries a UL approved milling treatment classification.
11 Install fire retardant treated wood with hot-dipped galvanized fasteners and hardware.
12 Do not use staples for fastening plywood. Galvanized nails permitted only.
13
14 PROTECTION
15 Protect other work against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Construction of wood framework using lumber, plywood, and other sheathing materials. Miscellaneous
5 blocking and curbing, concealed wood framing and furring. Includes rough hardware to join members and
6 anchor framework.
7
8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 Framing Lumber:
10 Grade mark and trademark of association listed below and having jurisdiction must appear on each piece
11 of material.
12 On members scheduled to receive transparent finish do not place grade mark stamp where exposed to
13 view. In lieu thereof stamp where concealed, or submit Certificate of Inspection.
14 WWPA: Western Wood Products Assn., 522 SW Fifth Avenue, Portland, OR 97204-2122.
15 APA: American Plywood Assn., 1119 A Street; Tacoma, WA 98401.
16
17 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
18 Protect against moisture, damage, and discoloration.
19 Do not store wood materials in wet or damp areas, or in contact with ground.
20 Avoid overloading floor and roof framing with stored materials.
21
22 COORDINATION
23 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
24
25 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
26
27 FRAMING LUMBER
28 Material:
29 Douglas fir, surfaced 4 sides to standard nominal dimensions except where rough sawn stock or special
30 shapes are indicated.
31 Grade:
32 Comply with current WWPA Standard Grading Rules as follows:
33 Headers and Beams: No. 1.
34 Other Framing Lumber: Standard and better.
35 Furring, Bracing and Blocking: Utility grade.
36 Maximum moisture content when delivered to project:
37 All wood materials: 19%.
38
39 PLYWOOD
40 US Product Standard 1-07, exterior type where exposed to moisture.
41 Each piece shall bear APA Grade mark.
42 Unless otherwise specified use Group 1 Douglas Fir; Grade"A"for exposed surfaces, "C"or better
43 elsewhere.
44
45 PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING
46 Grade: APA C-D with exterior glue, Exposure 1.
47 Thickness: Match thickness of existing sheathing.
48 Span Rating: 24/0
49 Sheet Size: 48 X 96 inch size, unless otherwise indicated.
50 Surface Finish: Unsanded.
51 Edges: Square.
52
53 FASTENERS
54 Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-575.
55 Nuts: Fed. Spec. FF-N-836.
56 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-561.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ROUGH CARPENTRY 0610 00-2
1 Wood Screws: Fed. Spec. FF-S-111.
2 Nails and Staples: Fed. Spec FF-N-1058.
3 Provide washers under bolt heads, lag heads, and nuts.
4 Provide all necessary for installation of work specified herein.
5 Hot-dip galvanize steel fasteners exposed to moisture.
6
7 WOOD FURRING
8 Square edge stock, thickness, size and spacing as required.
9
10 WOOD BLOCKING
11 Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, provide 2 inch nominal framing lumber behind cabinets, finish
12 hardware including door stops, toilet room accessories, mirrors, miscellaneous specialties, building
13 equipment, and mechanical and electrical work. Verify exact location.
14 Provide 3/4" plywood backing at the following locations:
15 Each side of windows at Pharmacy 120, employee side of wall.
16 Each side of windows at Reception 111, employee side of wall.
17 At TV monitor location in Waiting 113.
18 At TV monitor location in Clinical Supervisor 138.
19
20 ATTACHMENTS FOR WOOD ENGAGING MASONRY OR CONCRETE
21 Approved type expansion bolts, spaced as directed.
22
23 ADHESIVE
24 Glue conforming with APA Spec. AFG-01.
25 Approved manufacturers: Evans, Franklin, Georgia-Pacific, Glidden-Durkee, 3M, Weldwood, Willhold,
26 Weyerhaeuser.
27
28 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29
30 EXAMINATION
31 Verify that surfaces to receive work specified herein are rigid, secure, accurately sized and located, and
32 otherwise properly prepared.
33 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of surfaces requiring correction.
34 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
35
36 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
37 Where necessary verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
38 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions, modify work as required for accurate fit. If
39 measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
40
41 INSTALLATION -GENERAL
42 Install proprietary products in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
43 Use additional fasteners to those specified herein where necessary to insure rigidity and permanence.
44 Provide washers under nuts and heads when making bolted or lag screwed connections.
45 Drive nails perpendicular to grain in lieu of toe-nailing, where feasible.
46 Provide for installation and support of plumbing, heating, ventilating, and electrical work.
47 Accurately, located, cut, fit, and install work secure rigid, to true lines, plumb, and level, unless otherwise
48 indicated.
49
50 WOOD FURRING •
51 Secure with fasteners spaced not more than 2 ft. apart.
52
53 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
54 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up or replace when directed, products which
55 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
56 Leave surfaces ready for finishing specified in other sections.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-3
1 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
2
3 PROTECTION
4 Protect other work against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
5
6 NAILING SCHEDULE
7 Unless otherwise shown on drawings or in this specification, nailing shall be in accordance with the
8 Building Code.
9
10
11 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Fabrication and incorporation of site-built and site-finished wood moldings, trim and paneling.
5
6 QUALITY STANDARDS
7 General:
8 Unless otherwise modified herein, materials and workmanship quality grades shall be determined by the
9 Associations listed below.
10 Standards may be obtained from Association.
11 Plywood, Fir Lumber, and Workmanship:
12 Quality Standards of American Woodwork Institute, herein-after referred to as AWI, 5055 South
13 Chesterfield Road; Arlington, VA 22206.
14 Cedar Lumber:
15 Grading Rules for Western Lumber of Western Wood Products Association, hereinafter refe rred to as
16 WWPA, 1500 Yeon Building; Portland, OR 97204.
17
18 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
19 Do not deliver products to jobsite until notified by General Contractor that project is conditioned and
20 prepared to handle and store products without damage or discoloration.
21 Protect against damage and discoloration.
22
23 PROJECT CONDITIONS
24 Illumination:
25 Perform no work with less than 30 ft. candles of light measured 3 ft. above floor.
26 Temperature:
27 Maintain 50°F minimum in interior spaces where finish carpentry materials are located.
28
29 PART 2 —PRODUCTS
30
31 MOISTURE CONTENT IN LUMBER
32 12% maximum.
33
34 BOARD SIDING
35 Species: Cedar
36 VVWPA Grade: A
37 Grain: Mixed.
38 Surface Texture: Resawn to match existing siding
39 Type: Drop—verify to match existing siding profile.
40 Nominal Size: Verify to match existing siding.
41 Board Edges: Verify to match existing siding.
42
43 EXTERIOR TRIM •
44 Species: Cedar
45 Grain: Clear, mixed.
46 AWI Grade: Custom
47 Surface Texture: Resawn to match existing trim.
48 Minimum Lengths: Opening Trim: 1 piece, single length.
49 Standing Trim: No less than full story height.
50 Running Trim: Joints no closer than 12 ft. apart.
51
52 FABRICATION
53 General:
54 Conform to AWI Custom Grade, unless specifically noted otherwise.
55 Conceal end grain in exposed surfaces.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-2
1 Kerf backs of flat grain members more than 5 inches wide or more than 1 inch nominal thickness.
2 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3
4 EXAMINATION
5 Verify that surfaces to receive finish carpentry are straight, plumb, true, solid, rigid, and otherwise properly
6 prepared.
7 Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
8 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
9
10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
11 Verify prior to fabrication.
12 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions, modify work as required for accurate fit. If
13 measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabricating work.
14
15 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
16 Miter corners.
17 Ease sharp external corners prior to finishing.
18
19 BOARD SIDING INSTALLATION
20 Install to match existing siding.
21 Fasten as recommended by manufacturer using hot-dipped galvanized nails.
22 Drive boards tight, fit against trim with 1/16" space, miter carefully at corners. Do not over-drive fasteners.
23 Install in 8 ft. minimum random lengths, square-cut end joints, and stagger joints at least 4 ft.
24 Apply primer before installation.
25
26 TRIM INSTALLATION
27 Fit carefully at joints and against other members; all joints on bearings, secure with hot-dip galvanized
28 casing nails of proper size. Bevel-cut and glue end joints.
29 Set exposed nails using flathead punch 1/16 inch below wood surface. •
30
31 PAINTING AND FINISHING included in this section:
32 Before installing, finish concealed ends of exterior trim.
33
34 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING
35 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
36 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
37 Leave surfaces ready for finishing.
38 Remove debris from site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
39
40 PROTECTION
41 Protect other surfaces against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
42
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Shop fabricated or site-built cabinetry and woodwork requiring expert craftsmanship and joinery.
5
6 QUALITY STANDARDS
7 Except as herein modified, material and workmanship grades shall be determined by Quality Standards of
8 Architectural Woodwork Institute, Current Edition, published by Architectural Woodwork Institute, 5055
9 S. Chesterfield Road; Arlington, VA 22206.
10 Institute hereinafter referred to as "AWI".
11
12 SUBMITTALS
13 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
14 Product Data:
15 Include manufacturer's descriptive literature for specialty items.
16 Identify each item as to location, material grade, workmanship grade, wood specie and finish type.
17 Shop Drawings:
18 Show profiles,joint details, and other pertinent items.
19 Show connections to adjacent work, and complete assembly, whether or not materials are furnished by
20 mill.
21
22 EMISSIONS STANDARDS
23 Conform to the following minimum standards for sealant emissions:
24 Adhesive Type VOC Limits Standard
25 Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
26 Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
27 Special Purpose Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
28 Wood Adhesive: 140 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
29 Top &Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
30 Aerosol Adhesives: Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesive GS-36 requirements.
31 Submit manufacturer's product data listing volatile organic compound (VOC) content of products specified
32 herein.
33 Provide manufacturer's documentation verifying that adhesives and sealants contain no urea-
34 formaldehyde.
35
36 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
37 Do not deliver products to job site until notified by General Contractor that project is conditioned and
38 prepared to handle and store products without damage or discoloration.
39 Protect against damage and discoloration.
40
41 PROJECT CONDITIONS
42 Illumination:
43 Perform no work with less than 30 ft. candles of light measured 3 ft. above floor.
44 Temperature:
45 Maintain 50°F minimum in interior spaces where casework and shelving are located and installed.
46
47 COORDINATION
48 Coordinate with other trades regarding work of this section.
49
50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
51
52 FINISH LUMBER
53 Concealed: Casework Contractor's choice.
54 Exposed: Douglas fir, hemlock or poplar, AWI Custom grade, vertical grain.
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-2
1 PLYWOOD
2 Type:
3 Douglas fir, US Product Standard PS 1-07, exterior type where exposed to moisture or around sinks.
4 Face:
5 Rotary cut veneer, AWI Custom Grade.
6
7 PARTICLE BOARD
8 Plain Particle Board:
9 Conform to ANSI 208.1, Grade M2, 47 pcf minimum density, no urea formaldehyde emissions; *Roseburg
10 Forest Products"SkyBlend" or accepted substitute.
11 Prefinished Particle Board:
12 Type: Thermoset decorative laminate panels, cabinet grade (LPDL).
13 Cladding Material: Thermally-fused melamine.
14 Substrate: Particle board as specified above.
15 Manufacturer: Roseburg Forest Products Co. "SkyBlend", or accepted substitute.
16 Edge Treatment: PVC edging, match color of panel finish.
17 Finish as follows: •
18 Shelving: Color finish both sides and all edges.
19 Dividers: Color finish only on visible faces and edges.
20 Cabinet Bottoms: Color finish on exposed side and edge only.
21 Color as selected by Architect.
22
23 PLASTIC LAMINATE (HPDL)
24 Plastic Laminate:
25 Conform to NEMA Standard LD-3-1985.
26 Thickness:
27 Countertops and Backsplashes: NEMA GP50, 0.05 inch.
28 Elsewhere: NEMA GP28, 0.03 inch.
29 Color and Pattern:
30 Casework base and wall cabinets: WilsonArt 4663-60 Tawny Legacy.
31 Countertops and Backsplashes: WlsonArt 4903-38, Antique Glass.
32 Primer, Sealer and Adhesive:
33 Water-resistant type, made or recommended by covering manufacturer.
34
35 FINISH HARDWARE
36 Adjustable Shelf Hardware:
37 Knape &Vogt No. 332 nickel plated steel brackets, 5mm diameter, or accepted substitute.
38 Door Hinges:
39 Concealed, self-closing type with nickel plated finish, 125°opening angle; Blum 125 Series, or accepted
40 substitute.
41 Provide adhesive back felt door bumpers at all self-closing doors.
42 Door and Drawer Pulls
43 Wire type, 4 inches wide; Stanley 4484, or accepted substitute.
44 Drawer Slides:
45 Epoxy coated, Blum BS 230E, or accepted substitute.
46 Adjustable Wall Shelf Hardware:
47 Standards: Knape &Vogt No. 87 heavy duty wall standard, anochrome finish, or accepted substitute.
48 Brackets: Knape &Vogt No. 187 Heavy Duty bracket, anochrome finish, or accepted substitute.
49 Shelf Rest: Provide proper type for installation, anochrome finish.
50 Casework Locks:
51 Specified in Section 08 71 00.
52
53 GROMMETS
54 Black plastic, 2 3/8 inches outside diameter,1 7/8 inches inside diameter, with cover plate; Doug Mockett
55 and Company No. TG, or accepted substitute.
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-3
1 FABRICATION
2 General:
3 Conform to AWI 400B standards for laminate-clad casework, Custom Grade, Reveal Overlay type, unless
4 specifically noted otherwise.
5 All shelves adjustable unless otherwise shown.
6 Verify dimension of sinks and other items to be built into cases and counters.
7 Assemble at mill where feasible.
8 Conceal end grain in exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
9 Assemble cases with adhesive.
10 Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.
11 Use screws and bolts where required for strength and rigidity.
12 Install finish hardware specified herein at mill.
13 Machine sand exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
14 Materials, unless specifically noted otherwise:
15 Exposed materials: HPDL clad particle board.
16 Semi-exposed materials: LPDL clad particle board.
17 Concealed materials: Softwood.
18 Casework Bottoms, Ends, and Vertical Standards: 3/4 inch thick particle board.
19 Countertops: 3/4 inch thick particle board.
20 Shelving: 3/4 inch thick particle board.
21 Swinging Doors: 3/4 inch thick particle board.
22 Concealed Casework Backs: 1/4 inch thick particle board.
23 Drawer Sides: 1/2 inch thick particle board.
24 Drawer Backs: 1/2 inch thick particle board.
25 Drawer Bottoms: 1/4 inch particle board.
26 Drawer Stops: Integral side type. Do not use drawer front as stop.
27 Edge Banding: Provide at exposed plywood and particle board edges in accordance with AWI Standards
28 and as specified herein.
29 Adjustable Shelf Hardware:
30 Provide bracket holes at 32 mm centers to within 6 inches of top and bottom of space where adjustable
31 shelves are shown.
32
33 PART 3 -EXECUTION
34
35 EXAMINATION
36 Verify that surfaces to receive casework and shelving are straight, plumb, true, solid, rigid, and otherwise
37 properly prepared.
38 Prior to starting work, notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
39 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
40
41 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
42 Verify prior to fabricating casework and shelving.
43 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions modify work as required for accurate fit. If
44 measurements differ substantially, notify Architect prior to fabricating work.
45
46 INSTALLATION
47 Miter corners, and bevel-cut and glue joints.
48 Provide continuous bases under in-line base casework, unless otherwise indicated.
49 Secure casework in place plumb, square, true, level, and without distortion; level where necessary with
50 concealed shims.
51 Secure casework to backing with countersunk screws.
52 Accurately scribe face plates, filler strips, and trim strips to adjacent surface irregularities.
53 Remove sharp external corners prior to finishing.
54
55 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
56 Follow manufacturer's directions
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00-4
1 Match and align any patterns.
2 Make necessary covering joints with tight, nearly invisible, hairline cracks.
3
4 PLASTIC LAMINATE (HPDL) INSTALLATION
5 Countertops:
6 No"L"shaped pieces at countertop corners or longitudinal seams permitted; cross seams 12 ft. apart
7 minimum and at least 24 inches away from any counter sinks.
8 Provide cut-outs for sinks and other openings; verify size and location.
9 Vertical Surfaces:
10 No longitudinal seams permitted; vertical seams 12 ft. apart minimum.
11 Backsplash:
12 Extend backsplash covering up wall to vertical height shown on drawings.
13 Return backsplash along end walls to counter front, unless otherwise indicated.
14 Self-Edging:
15 Unless otherwise shown on drawings, provide at exposed countertop edges.
16 Align with adjacent surfaces.
17
18 ADJUSTMENTS
19 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
20
21 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
22 Promptly remove any excess adhesive or sealant.
23 Remove any stains or markings from plastic laminate surfaces.
24 Including work of other sections, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
25 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
26 Leave surfaces ready for finishing.
27 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
28
29 PROTECTION
30 Protect other surfaces against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
31
32
33
34 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PLASTIC PANELING 06 65 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Wall coverings of plastic panels over solid substrate for light, medium and heavy duty usage.
5
6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
7 Qualifications:
8 Workmen must have at least 2 years prior experience performing work of type specified herein, and be
9 approved by covering manufacturer.
10 Regulatory Requirements:
11 Maximum ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating: Class C.
12 Maximum ASTM E 84 Smoke Developed Rating: 450.
13
14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
15 Store in clean and dry storage area.
16 Protect against damage and discoloration.
17 Protect from sunlight exposure.
18 Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge.
19
20 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
21 Install wall covering only when air temperature and humidity conditions approximate those that will exist
22 when building is occupied.
23 Acclimate panels to installation environment minimum 24 hours prior to installation.
24 Do not install covering on surfaces which are colder than 65°F.
25 Do not install covering under less than 30 ft. candles of light measured 3 ft. above floor.
26 Notify General Contractor, if necessary, to provide additional light.
27
28 WARRANTY
29 Manufacturer's Warranty:
30 Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized
31 company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may
32 have under Contract Documents.
33 Installer's Warranty Period:
34 One (1)year commencing on Date of Substantial Completion."
35
36 COORDINATION
37 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
38
39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
40
41 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS
42 Panel Type: Prefinished fiberglass reinforced plastic with embossed finish surface.
43 Material: Random chopped fiberglass reinforcement, modified polyester copolymer resin mix with inorganic
44 fillers and pigments.
45 Panel Size: 48"X 96", or as required for installation.
46 Nominal Thickness: 0.09".
47 Color: White.
48 Manufacturer and Pattern: Kemlite "Glasbord-P", or accepted substitute.
49
50 ACCESSORIES
51 Moldings: Manufacturer's standard one-piece extruded plastic, color to match panel color.
52 Fasteners: Insulating nylon drive rivets, length as required for installation, color to match panels color.
53 Adhesive: Waterproof type recommended by panel manufacturer.
54 Sealant: Silicone type as specific in Section 07 92 00, color to match panel color.
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PLASTIC PANELING 06 65 00-2
1 PART 3-EXECUTION
2
3 EXAMINATION
4 Verify that surfaces to receive wall and ceiling covering are true, sound, clean, dry and dust-free, free from
5 conditions that would damage covering or impair adhesive bond, and otherwise properly prepared.
6 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction,
7 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
8
9 PREPARATION
10 Before applying covering remove any finish hardware, electric cover plates, mechanical grilles and registers,
11 etc. which would interfere with covering application.
12 Carefully store removed items and replace following covering application.
13
14 SURFACE PREPARATION
15 Follow manufacturer's directions.
16
• 17 INSTALLATION
18 Follow manufacturer's directions.
19 Take special care to insure complete adhesion at joints, edges, and corners.
20 Provide minimum 1/4" gap at ceiling joint and 1/8"gap between adjacent panels.
21 Pre-drill fastener holes oversized 1/8"to allow for panel expansion and contraction.
22 Apply adhesive to entire panel surface.
23 Set panels prior to"skinning"of adhesive.
24 Press panels firmly to substrate and install fasteners.
25 Provide single row of fasteners at top and bottom of panel as recommended by panel manufacturer for
26 adhesive installation.
27 Install panels with moldings between adjacent panels, at wall corners, and exposed panel edges.
28 Apply sealant to molding channel prior to installing on panel. Apply sealant to opposite molding channel
29 prior to installing adjacent panel.
30 Allow for specified gap between adjacent panels when installing moldings.
31 Remove excess sealant.
32
33 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
34 Remove adhesive and sealant from surfaces during application.
35 Replace defective and improperly applied material.
36 Leave surfaces clean and defect-free at time of final acceptance.
37 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
38 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have
39 been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
40
41 PROTECTION •
42 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
43
44
45 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Thermal insulation organic or inorganic applied to walls, roofs, and other heated spaces.
5
6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
7 Deliver to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packages.
8 Label package wrappers with brand name, insulation type, and thermal rating.
9 Store materials off ground.
10 Protect against moisture and damage.
11 Do not use damaged or damp insulation.
12
13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
14 Do not install insulation when surfaces to receive insulation are wet.
15
16 COORDINATION
17 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
18
19 PART 2-PRODUCTS
20
21 FLEXIBLE BATTS
22 Manufacturer:
23 Manufactured by Johns-Manville, US Gypsum, Owens-Corning, Certain-teed, or accepted substitute.
24 Material:
25 Glass wool blankets, full-length, single-piece where practicable, conforming to Fed. Spec.HH-I-521.
26 Facings:
27 Manufacturers standard kraft paper or foil vapor retarder facing conforming to Fed. Spec. HH-I-521 E, type
28 II; FS 25 facing where exposed in attic.
29 Maximum Permeability Rating: 1.0 perms.
30 Extent of Work:
31 Provide blanket insulation as follows: At exterior of all heated spaces in thickness and locations as shown
32 on Drawings.
33
34 VAPOR RETARDER TAPE
35 Adhesive-backed, mylar-faced aluminum foil, 1-1/2 inches wide, 0.00 perm rating; Alumiseal Zero Perm;
36 adhesive-backed, polyethylene by Monsanto Plastics & Resins Co.; adhesive-backed, Polypropylene
37 sheathing tape No. 8086 by 3M Contractor Products, or accepted substitute.
38
39 WIRE
40 Noncorrosive steel, 18 ga. minimum.
41
42 ADHESIVE
43 Manufactured or recommended by insulation manufacturer.
44
45 MECHANICAL FASTENERS
46 Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
47 Long enough to penetrate substrate 1/2 inch, minimum.
48
49 PART 3 -EXECUTION
50
51 EXAMINATION
52 Verify that work of,preceding trades is completed.
53 Verify that surfaces and spaces to receive insulation are accurately sized, located, dry, protected against
54 inclement weather, clean, and otherwise properly prepared.
55 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
56 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2
1 PREPARATION
2 Remove, or protect against projections which may damage insulation or prevent proper installation.
3 Remove bond-reducing coatings, and roughen surfaces, to receive insulation by adhesion as necessary
4 for bond.
5 Prime surfaces to receive insulation by adhesion.
6
7 INSULATION INSTALLATION -GENERAL
8 Follow manufacturer's directions.
9 Install insulation with vapor retarder facing to the warm-in-winter side of assembly.
10 Use full-length, single-piece batts where practicable.
11 Staple facing flanges to wood framing, 8 inches on center maximum.
12 Provide additional wire support as necessary to prevent insulation displacement or sagging.
13 Fit insulation snugly between framing without forcing.
14 Permit no gaps for air passage.
15 Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduits, and other obstructions.
16 Where pipes, conduit, and other obstructions are located in space to receive insulation, place insulation
17 between cold-in-winter surface and obstruction, compressing insulation where necessary.
18 Unless indicated otherwise, do not compress insulation more than 10%.
19
20 VAPOR RETARDER PATCHING
21 Patch and seal vapor retarder punctures, tears, and voids with vapor-proof tape.
22 Permit no openings for vapor passage.
23
24 INSPECTION
25 Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to completing insulation work for inspection.
26
27 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
28 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replacewhen directed, products which
29 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
30 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
31
32 PROTECTION
33 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
34
35
36 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Elastic sheet vapor retarders for all exterior thermal insulation and air barrier installed as part of the
5 exterior envelope construction.
6
7 SUBMITTALS
8 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
9 Product Data:
10 Manufacturer's data and detailsto include installation instructions.
11 Samples:
12 Two 8 1/2" x 11" samples of vapor retarder material.
13
14 QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 Subcontract the vapor retarder work of this section to the installer of associated work so there will be
16 undivided responsibility for the related items of work.
17
18 PROJECT CONDITIONS
19 Proceed with vapor retarder work only after substrate work has been completed.
20 The contractor shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the vapor retarder work is to
21 be preformed. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.
22 Environmental Requirements:
23 Proceed with vapor retarder work only when weather conditions will permit the materials to be applied in
24 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
25
26 COORDINATION
27 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
28
29 PART 2- PRODUCTS
30
31 WALL UNDERLAYMENT
32 Underlayment: Water-resistant treated weather-resistive barrier, Two-Ply Super Jumbo-Tex 60, or
33 accepted substitute.
34 Flexible Flashing: Polyolefin film laminated to both sides of internal fiberglass reinforcement; Fortifiber
35 "Moistop neXT", or accepted substitute.
36 Sealant: One component, moisture-curing urethane elastomeric type; Fortifiber"Moistop Sealant"or
37 accepted substitute.
38
39 PART 3 - EXECUTION
40
41 EXAMINATION
42 Verify that surfaces to receive work specified herein are rigid, secure, accurately sized and located, and
43 otherwise properly prepared.
44 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of surfaces requiring correction.
45 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
46
47 PREPARATION
48 Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to the work; comply with recommendations of
49 the vapor retarder manufacturer.
50 Remove ice, snow, grease, dust or other foreign material that may prevent bonding to substrate.
51 Prime substrate where recommended by the manufacturer.
52 Ensure items which pass through membrane are properly and rigidly installed, substrate is free of
53 projections and irregularities which may be detrimental to proper installation of membrane.
54
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00-2
1 INSTALLATION —WALL UNDERLAYMENT
2 Apply underlayment under exterior wood siding in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, laid
3 smooth without folds or bunches of material.
4 Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer.
5 Seal edges and items projecting through vapor retarders and vapor barriers.
6 Inspect and repair underlayment prior to application of finish material over underlayment; tape tears,
7 perforations and similar damage.
8
9 PROTECTION
10 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
11
12
13 END OF SECTION
•
•
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealants, caulking compounds, compression seals,joint fillers and
5 related accessories.
6
7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
8 Protect against damage.
9 Store products in original, tightly sealed containers, original labels thereon.
10 Do not exceed sealant shelf life.
11
12 SUBMITTALS
13 Submit manufacturer's product data listing volatile organic compound (VOC) content of products specified
14 herein.
15 Provide manufacturer's documentation verifying that sealants contain no urea-formaldehyde.
16
17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
18 Perform no work when weather exceeds manufacturer's specified limits.
19
20 EMISSIONS STANDARDS
21 Conform to the following minimum standards for sealant emissions:
22 Sealant Type VOC Limits Standard
23 Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
24 Other Sealants: 420 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
25
26 COORDINATION
27 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
28
29 PART 2- PRODUCTS
30
31 SILICONE SEALANT
32 GE, Dow, Bostik 1250, with mildew inhibitor, conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543.
33 Select proper type in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
34
35 URETHANE SEALANT
36 Vertical Joints:
37 Non-sag, one component type; Pecora"Dynatrol I", Sonneborn "Sonolastic NP 1", Bostik Chem-Caulk
38 915.
39 Horizontal Joints:
40 Self-leveling, one component type; Pecora"Urexpan NR-201", Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 1", Bostik
41 Chem-Cail 955-SL.
42
43 FOAM AIR-INFILTRATION SEALANT
44 Grace Polycel One.
45
46 SEALANT COLORS
47 Urethane Sealant: Approximate color of adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise directed.
48 Silicone Sealant: Approximate color of adjacent surfaces, or clear if color not available.
49 Foam Sealant: Contractor's choice.
50
51 PRIMER AND SURFACE CONDITIONER
52 Made or recommended by manufacturer of compound or sealant.
53
54 BACKER ROD
55 Closed-cell polyethylene gasketing rod, Dow"Ethaform," or accepted substitute.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2
1 Diameter: 1/4 greater than width of joint where to be installed.
2
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
4
5 EXAMINATION
6 Inspect joints to be sealed and verify that joints are clean, dry, and free from dust, oil, grease, rust,
7 lacquer, laitance, loose mortar, or other bond-reducing matter.
8 Allow concrete surfaces to dry at least 4 weeks before sealing.
9 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
10 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
11
12 PREPARATION
13 General:
14 Remove dust, dirt and other foreign matter from joints to be sealed by brushing and air-blowing.
15 Priming:
16 Prime unpainted surfaces to receive sealant.
17 Apply with bristle brush. Do not flood surfaces.
18
19 BACKER INSTALLATION •
20 Install backer rod behind sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
21 Provide in as long continuous lengths as practicable.
22 Stretch taut and force into joints to uniform depth, approximately 1/2 Joint width but not to exceed 1/2 inch.
23 Replace any punctured backer rod.
24
25 .FOAM SEALANT INSTALLATION
26 Follow sealant manufacturer's directions.
27 Inject sealant continuously until opening is filled.
28 If opening is not filled within sealant snap time or maximum of 3 minutes, stop application for at least 15
29 minutes before resuming work.
30 Trim cured foam flush with adjacent surface.
31
32 OTHER SEALANT INSTALLATION
33 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's directions using gun-type dispenser.
34 Size gun nozzle to fit joint.
35 Seal joints before applying final paint coat.
36 Fill joints and voids solid; superficial pointing with skin bead not acceptable.
37 Install flush with adjacent surfaces.
38 Tool joints smooth within 10 minutes after installation.
39 Remove masking materials, if any, immediately after sealant installation.
40
41 APPLICATION
42 Caulk exterior and interior joints around window frames, door frames, and louver frames and other
43 openings in exterior walls with urethane sealant.
44 Caulk spaces around utility penetrations through walls and floors with foam penetrant sealant.
45 Where subject to air infiltration, caulk spaces between wall framing members and windows, doors, and
46 other openings in exterior walls with foam air-infiltration sealant.
47 Caulk space beneath exterior wall base plates with foam air infiltration sealant.
48 Caulk with silicone sealant where shown on Drawings.
49
50 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
51 Remove excess material as work progresses and leave surfaces neat, smooth, and clean.
52 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
53 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
54 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3
1 PROTECTION
2 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
3
4
5 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Shop fabricated metal doors, insulated or non-insulated, stock or custom sizes. Shop fabricated and
5 assembled or field assembled steel frames of standard profiles and measurements.
6
7 REFERENCES
8 Except as modified herein, conform to requirements of"Recommended Specifications Standard Steel
9 Doors and Frames," S.D.I. 100 (ANSI 250.8-2003), published by Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit Road,
10 Westlake, Ohio 44145; 440-899-0010.
11 Conform to requirements of ANSI 250.4-2001, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical
12 Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings; and ANSI 250.10-1998,
13 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
14 Specifications may be obtained from Institute.
15
16 SUBMITTALS
17 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
18 Shop Drawings:
19 Show elevations, principal construction features, and dimensions of each door type and frame type,
20 cut-outs, reinforcement,joints, welds, finish, anchoring and other pertinent details.
21 Locate and detail field splice joints for frames too large to ship in one piece.
22 Indicate instructions for making field splices.
23 Manufacturer's published details may be substituted for standard stock items, provided required
24 information is included.
25
26 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
27 Fabricate doors and frames where scheduled to be fire-restrictive in accordance with Underwriters
28 Laboratories requirements. Affix UL Acceptance Label on each piece.
29
30 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
31 Protect against damage and discoloration.
32 Remove door wrappings upon jobsite delivery.
33 Store doors and frames upright in protected dry area, at least one inch above ground or floor, and with at
34 least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
35 Brace bottom ends of frame jambs against displacement.
36
37 COORDINATION
38 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
39
40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
41
42 MATERIALS
43 General:
44 Steel, carbon, cold-rolled, commercial quality: ASTM A 366.
45 Steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, general requirements: ASTM A 525.
46 Steel, carbon, hot-rolled sheet and strip, commercial quality: ASTM A 569.
47 Sheet steel, cold-rolled, electrolytic zinc coated: ASTM A 591.
48 Supports and Anchors:
49 Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel.
50 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners:
51 General: Comply with ASTM A 153, class C or D as applicable.
52 Items built into exterior walls: Galvanized.
53 Elsewhere: Manufacturer's standard units.
54
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13-2
1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
2 Type: Level II, Model 1, heavy duty 1-3/4 inch.
3 Style: Style F unless otherwise shown on Drawings, full flush hollow steel construction.
4 Construction: 18 gage.
5 Core: Solid foam core.
6
7 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
8 Gauqe Construction:
9 Exterior Frames: 16 gage.
10 Interior Frames less than 40 inches wide: 18 gage.
11 Frame Type:
12 Construction: Full welded.
13 Frame Face: Standard 2"width.
14 Frame Depth: 5 3/4 inches unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required for wall width.
15
16 ANCHORS
17 General:
18 Follow referenced specifications.
19 To Stud Walls:
20 Full frame width and depth, welded to frame.
21 Minimum quantity: 3 per jamb.
22
23 FABRICATION
24 General:
25 Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle.
26 Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper
27 assembly at project site.
28 Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish.
29 Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed.
30 Fabricate with 26 gage minimum dust cover boxes at hardware mortises.
31 Fabricate with the following clearances:
32 Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch.
33 Between door sills and thresholds: 1/4 inch.
34 Between door sills and floor: 5/8 inch.
35 Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 1/8 inch.
36 Shop Finish:
37 Dress surface irregularities to smooth surface.
38 Chemically treat and clean exposed surfaces.
39 Manufacturer's standard, bonderized, and one coat baked-on rust inhibiting prime paint. •
40 Doors:
41 Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams of honeycomb core type doors and panels. Leave seams
42 invisible, or weld, fill and grind smooth.
43 Fabricate exterior doors with flush tops.
44 Provide astragals for double doors where removable center mullions are not provided. Provide in
45 accordance with UL requirements for labeled doors and panels.
46 Frames:
47 Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded
48 joints to smooth uniform finish.
49 Accurately cope and securely weld butt joints of mullions and transoms of glazed lights. Grind welded
50 joints to smooth uniform finish.
51 Reinforce frames wider than four feet with 12 gage formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top
52 of frames.
53 Hardware reinforcement:
54 Make standard provision for hardware listed in Section 08 71 00, in accordance with ANSI/SDI 250.6-2003
55 "Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-3
1 Reinforce for hardware listed in Hardware Schedule, Section 08 71 00.
2 Provide standard reinforcement for door closers whether or not closers are listed in Hardware Schedule,
3 Section 08 71 00.
4
5 PART 3 - EXECUTION
6
7 EXAMINATION
8 Verify that openings to receive hollow steel doors and frames are accurately sized and located, square,
9 plumb, and otherwise properly prepared.
10 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
11 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
12
13 PREPARATION
14 Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication.
15 If minor differences exist between field measurements and drawing dimensions, modify work as required
16 for accurate fit. Notify Architect about major differences prior to fabrication.
17
18 INSTALLATION
19 Follow referenced specifications and manufacturer's instructions.
20 Secure anchors to adjacent construction.
21 Set frames true with adjacent construction.
22 Accurately position work. Set doors flush with frame face.
23 Set doors plumb to hold any desired position.
24 Install glazed light frames with welded glass stops on security side.
25 Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors.
26
27 ADJUSTING
28 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
29
30 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
31 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
32 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
33 Leave surfaces ready for finish painting specified in Section 09 90 00.
34 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
35
36 PROTECTION
37 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
38 Protect contacting dissimilar materials against electrolytic corrosion.
39
40
41 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Hollow and solid core wood doors, solid wood stiles and rails and/or plastic laminate face veneer.
5
6 REFERENCES
7 For Hardwood Veneer Faced Doors: National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association Industry Standards
8 I.S.1-97.
9 Standard may be obtained from association at 400 W. Madison Street, Chicago, III. 60606.
10 For Softwood Doors: Fir and Hemlock Door Association, Industry Standard FHDA 5-75.
11 Standard may be obtained from Association at 1500 Yeon Building, Portland, Oregon 97204.
12
13 OPTIONS
14 Prefitting doors to frames and preparing for finish hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 may, at
15 Contractor's option, be performed at mill.
16 Flush panel doors with openings therein, may, at Contractor's option, be fabricated with stile and rail
17 cores.
18
19 SUBMITTALS
20 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
21 Shop Drawings:
22 Show elevations, principal construction features and dimensions of each door type.
23
24 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
25 Fire Resistance Rating Certification Agency: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
26
27 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
28 Do not deliver to jobsite until notified by General Contractor that project is conditioned and prepared to
29 handle and store products without damage or discoloration.
30 Protect against damage and discoloration.
31 Store flat on level, dry surface and in well ventilated space.
32 Cover for protection, but allow air circulation.
33
34 COORDINATION
35 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
36
37 PART 2-PRODUCTS
38
39 CORE
40 Interior Flush Solid Core Doors:
41 Particle board type with 1 1/8 inch minimum width stiles.
42
43 FACE
44 At doors to be stained and varnished:
45 Rotary cut, unselected birch.
46 Veneer Grade: HPVA Grade M.
47 Construction Grade: AWI Premium Grade.
48 Book matched veneers. Carefully match veneers for color.
49
50 EDGE BAND
51 At wood veneer faced doors:
52 1/2 inch thick, minimum.
53 Species: Manufacturer's standard hardwood, matched for color.
54
•
55 ADHESIVE
56 Commercial Standards CS-171, Type I.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
WOOD DOORS 0814 00-2
1 FACTORY FINISH
2 Finishing Standards: Conform to WDMA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI Division 1500-S-4—
3 Finish System Standards.
4 Type: Water-based stain with ultra-violet(UV) cured polyurethane complying with EPA Title 5 guidelines
5 for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Meet or exceed performance standards of
6 TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
7 Stain Color: Selected by Architect.
8
9 FABRICATION
10 Conform to referenced standards "Premium"grade.
11 Prepare doors in accordance with "Standard Procedures and Recommendations for Factory Machining,"
12 published by National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association.
13 At paired doors match face veneers on adjacent door sides and identify matching faces.
14 Install glass, if any, in other doors with manufacturer's standard wood stops.
15 Tolerances:
16 Thickness: 1/16 inch plus or minus.
17 Size: 1/8 inch plus or minus; 1/32 inch for prefit doors.
18 Squareness: 1/4 inch maximum difference between opposite diagonal measurements.
19 Warp: 1/4 inch maximum space measured from horizontal, vertical, or diagonal straight edge to point of
20 maximum bow, cup or twist.
21
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
24 EXAMINATION
25 Verify that door frames are correct type, accurately located and sized, square, plumb, true, and otherwise
26 properly prepared.
27 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
28 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
29
30 PREPARATION OF DOORS FOR HANGING
31 Seal job-cut surfaces with 2 coats waterproof sealer compatible with door finish specified in Section 09 90
32 00.
33 Undercut doors as required for floor covering clearance.
34 Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing. Fit fire-rated doors for width by planing from lock side
35 only; for height by sawing bottom only.
36
37 INSTALLATION
38 Position doors flush with frame face.
39 Set plumb so door will hold any desired position.
40 Install with the following clearances:
41 Between doors and frames: 1/8 inch.
42 Between door sills and thresholds: 1/4 inch.
43 Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 1/8 inch.
44
45 ADJUSTMENTS
46 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
47
48 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
49 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
50 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
51 Leave surfaces ready for finishing specified in Section 09 90 00.
52 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
53
54 PROTECTION
55 Protect other surfaces against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
56 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2.
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Entrance, transom and sidelight systems fabricated of formed or extruded metals and all glass systems.
5
6 SUBMITTALS
7 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
8 Shop Drawings:
9 Show elevations, principal construction features, and dimensions of each door type and frame type,
10 cut-outs, reinforcement,joints, welds, finish, anchoring and other pertinent details.
11
12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
13 Protect against damage and discoloration.
14 Store doors and frames upright in protected dry area, at least one inch above ground or floor, and with at
15 least 1/4 inch between individual pieces.
16 Brace bottom ends of frame jambs against displacement.
17 Provide removable protective coating on exposed metalwork adjacent to plaster, gypsum board, or
18. sprayed gypsum work. Maintain until project completion.
19
20 COORDINATION •
21 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
22
23 WARRANTY
24 Total Storefront System:
25 Assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total storefront
26 installation including insulated glazing units, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc., as it
27 relates to air, water, and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop
28 drawings. Correct any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications by the
29 responsible contractor at their expense during the warranty period.
30 Material and Workmanship:
31 Per AAMA standard 601, provide written guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.
32 Warranty period shall be for 3 years from the date of final shipment.
33
34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
35
36 MATERIALS
37 Aluminum:
38 Alcoa, Kaiser, Reynolds, US Aluminum, or approved; alloys and tempers, unless modified hereunder, as
39 follows:
40 Structural shapes, blocking, bracing, and other concealed members: 6061-T6.
41 Exposed Extrusions: 6063-T6.
42 Casting: 214-T6.
43 Sheetmetal: 5005-H32.
44 Special Finishes: Modify alloys and tempers specified above as necessary for proper application
45 of special finishes specified hereunder.
46 Finish (unless modified hereunder):
47 Concealed Work: Mill Finish.
48 All other Work: AA-M12C22A31, clear anodized color.
49
50 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
51 Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40.
52 All other work: ASTM A 36.
53
54 FASTENERS
55 Type recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use.
56 Galvanically compatible with materials to be fastened. •
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-2
1 FRAMES
2 Material: Extruded aluminum.
3 Size and Profile: 2 inches x 41/2 inches unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
4 Wall Thickness: .125 inch.
5 Manufacturers: Kawneer, US Aluminum, Oldcastle, EFCO.
6
7 SWING DOORS
8 Material: Extruded aluminum.
9 Bottom Rail: 10 inches width.
10 Manufacturer: Kawneer Medium Stile 350, U.S. Aluminum Medium Stile 400 or equivalent doors by other
11 approved manufacturers.
12
13 GLASS STOPS
14 Square stops and non-stretch, high shore vinyl glazing beads reinforced with 60 pound test fiberglass cord
15 core against both glass faces.
16
17 FINISH HARDWARE
18 Provide the following Hardware by door manufacturer or supplier:
19 Pivots: Offset type, top, center and bottom, conforming to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
20 Number of hinges required: 3.
21 Closer: Surface type conforming to ANSI A156.4, Grade 2. Comply with ADAAG 4.13.10 AND
22 4.13.11 for maximum allowable sweep time and opening force. Provide with hold-open and back-
23 check.
24 Push/Pull Set: 3/4" diameter rod, Kawneer"CS9" pull, "CSII" push bar.
25 Threshold: Mill finish aluminum.
26 Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard flexible, non-porous polymeric strip. Provide for •
27 heads,jambs and sills of exterior doors. Sill weatherstrip adjustable for wear.
28 Cylinder: See Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware.
29
30 FABRICATION
31 General:
32 Provide concealed steel stiffeners where indicated or required to resist wind or other applied loads.
33 Fabricate connections as required for strength and rigidity using concealed mechanical fastenings
34 wherever possible. Where not possible, welding may be used.
35 Cut horizontal members between verticals.
36 Match exposed welds with adjacent material, free of porosity, cracks and blow-holes.
37 Select materials carefully for matching color and texture after finishing.
38 Fabricate flat surfaces smooth and true, free from waves, buckles, and seams.
39 Fabricate edges, corners, and angles clean, sharp, and square;joints precision fitted.
40 Allow for expansion and contraction.
41 Make exterior work permanently weathertight.
42 Clearances:
43 Fabricate with the following clearances:
44 Between Doors and Frames: 1/8 inch.
45 Between Door Sills and Thresholds: 1/4 inch.
46 Between meeting edges of pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.
47 Tolerances:
48 Member Alignment: True within 1/8 inch per 12 feet.
49 Openings: Accurately sized and located within 1/4 inch.
50 Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference between opposite diagonal measurements.
51
52 PART 3- EXECUTION
53
54 EXAMINATION
55 Verify that openings to receive work of this section are plumb, rigid, accurately sized and located, and
56 otherwise properly prepared.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-3
1 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
2 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
3
4 PREPARATION
5 Verify prior to fabrication.
6 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions modify work as required for accurate fit. If
7 measurements differ substantially notify Architect prior to fabrication.
8
9 INSTALLATION
10 Follow manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.
11 .Install plumb, square, true, rigid, secure, weathertight, and without glass-to-metal contact between panels
12 and frames.
13
14 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
15 Remove protective coatings.
16 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
17 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
18 Final glass cleaning specified in Supplementary Conditions.
19 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
20
21 PROTECTION
22 Protect other work against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section.
23
24
25
26 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Operating hardware and accessories for doors and windows not specifically supplied as part of the
5 manufactured item.
6
7 SUBMITTALS
8 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
9 Product Data: •
10 Submit three (3) copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware.
11 Hardware Schedule:
12 At the earliest possible date, submit three (3) copies of the finish hardware schedule, organized into
13 "hardware sets" and indicating complete designation of every item required for each door opening.
14 Submit a keying schedule in accordance with the Owner's representative.
15 Templates:
16 Furnish hardware templates for fabricators of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for
17 hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work to conform that adequate provisions
18 will be made for installation of hardware.
19
20 QUALIFICATIONS
21 Hardware Supplier shall employ person qualified for membership in American Society of Hardware
22 Consultants, who shall be available for consultation with Architect and Contractor during course of work.
23 Prior to final project acceptancesupplier's representative shall make one field inspection and notify
24 Architect if hardware installation complies with manufacturers instructions.
25 Prior to final project acceptance supplier's representative shall instruct Owner how to properly adjust and
26 maintain hardware.
27 Installer's Qualifications:
28 Approved by supplier.
29
30 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
31 Conform to Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified herein.
32 Notify Architect of difference prior to starting work.
33 Conform to UL requirements for fire-rated openings.
34 Conform to all applicable handicapped user requirements.
35
36 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
37 Package each item separately, and identify with hardware schedule number.
38 Deliver to General Contractor for installation in original, unopened containers with legible labels intact.
39 Ship tagged and identified keys by registered mail to Architect.
40 Include complete set of specialized hardware maintenance and removal tools for Owner's use. Store
41 where directed by Owner.
42 Protect against theft, damage, and discoloration.
43
44 COORDINATION
45 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
46
47 PART 2- PRODUCTS
48
49 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS
50 Manufacturer: Sargent, Schlage, Yale, or accepted substitute.
51 Design (Sargent basis of design):
52 Rose: L
53 Lever: L
54 Latchbolt Type: Anti-friction.
55 Backset: 2-3/4 inches.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-2
1 Strike Lip: Curved.
2
3 "OCCUPIED" INDICATOR DEADBOLTS
4 Type: Medium duty, ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.6, 2001,Grade 2, 1 inch bolt projection, adjustable
5 backset with wrought brass or bronze trim reinforced with steel insert.
6 Function: Deadbolt thrown or retracted by thumb-turn on inside, no outside operation. Bolt automatically
7 deadlocks when fully thrown.
8 Occupancy Indicator: Reads"In Use" or"Vacant" on outside face with color coding.
9 Manufacturer and Model: Falcon D271, or accepted substitute.
10 Provide emergency key.
11 Strike: Lipless.
12
13 BUTT HINGES
14 Manufacturer: McKinney, Stanley, Hager or accepted substitute.
15 Type: Mortise.
16 Sizes: 4%X 4% inches.
17 Size Hinges to clear any projecting trim or other obstructions where necessary to obtain maximum
18 possible door opening.
19 Quantity: 1 1/2 pair unless otherwise scheduled.
20 Provide non-removable pins on outswinging, exterior door hinges.
21 Provide non-rising loose pins at all other doors unless otherwise scheduled.
22
23 DOOR SILENCERS
24 At Metal Frames: Glynn Johnson#64, or accepted substitute.
25 Three silencers for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors.
26
27 DOOR CLOSERS
28 Manufacturer: Sargent, LCN, Yale, or accepted substitute.
29 Type: Surface mounted.
30 Size, unless otherwise scheduled:
31 One size larger than recommended by closer manufacturer for the following:
32 Any doors wider than 3'-6"
33 Any doors taller than 7'-6"
34 Any doors in shafts, stairwells, and other locations where differential air pressure may
35 occur.
36 Size recommended by closer manufacturer:
37 All other locations.
38 Fasteners: Concealed.
39 Unless specified elsewhere, do not restrict door swing.
40
41 KICKPLATES
42 Manufacturer: Hager or accepted substitute.
43 Height: Kickplates at 10 inches and mop plates at 8 inches, unless otherwise scheduled.
44 Width: 2 inches less than door width.
45
46 DOOR STOPS
47 Wall Stops:
48 Manufacturer: Ives, Hager or accepted substitute.
49 Type: See Hardware Schedule.
50 Locate at contact point except at any sliding doors.
51 In certain locations, it may be advantageous to apply stop on door.
52
53 CABINET LOCKS
54 Manufacturer: Sargent, Schlage, Yale, or accepted substitute.
55 Cylinder: 6-pin.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-3
1 Material: Brass body, bronze cam.
2
3 FASTENERS
4 Provide.required screws, bolts, and other fasteners.
5 Match hardware material and finish.
6 Use phillips head type where exposed to view.
7
8 KEYS
9 Material: Nickel-silver, or approved.
10 Keying Instructions: Masterkey and otherwise key locks as directed by Owner.
11 Number of keys required: Furnish 2 keys for each lock unless otherwise instructed.
12
13 FABRICATION
14 Make hardware for prefitted doors and frames to template. Send templates, together with hardware
15 schedule, to door and frame manufacturer not later than two weeks after hardware schedule approval.
16 Lock and latch components shall be manufactured by only one manufacturer, and carry that
17 manufacturer's warranty.
18 Fabricate joints with smooth, hair-line seams.
19
20 FINISHES
21 ANSI/BHMA No. 625 (US26D) brushed chrome except:
22 Door Closers: Spray painted to match hardware color.
23 Kickplates: Color as selected
24 Thresholds: As listed
25
26 PART 3 - EXECUTION
27
28 EXAMINATION
29 Verify that surfaces to receive finish hardware are properly prepared, including necessary backing.
30 Prior to staring work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
31 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
32
33 PREPARATION
34 Provide solid blocking for all wall stops.
35 Fasteners: Use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor all hardware per manufacturer's
36 templates. Self tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable. Closers on wood doors shall be through
37 bolted.
38
39 INSTALLATION
40 Accurately locate, fit, and install square, plumb, and secure in accordance with manufacturer's directions
41 and templates.
42 Mount units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" by NBHA,
43 except as otherwise indicated.
44 Mount at the following heights above the floor, unless otherwise shown on drawings:
45 Top Butt: 5 inches from door top to butt top.
46 Intermediate Butt: Equal distance between top and bottoms butts.
47 Bottom Butt: 10 inches to butt bottom.
48 Knob Locks: 38 inches to knob center.
49 Dead Locks: 48 inches to cylinder center.
50 Pull Plates: 42 inches to pull center.
51 Push Plates: 48 inches to plate center.
52 All others: Manufacturer's standard.
53 After fitting mortised hardware to surfaces to be painted remove and store hardware in original package
54 until painting completion, then permanently install.
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-4
1 ADJUSTING
2 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
3
4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
5 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
6 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
7 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
8
9 DEMONSTRATION
10 Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes.
11
12 PROTECTION
13 Protect other surfaces against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
14
15 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
16 Quantity Description Mfr Model Comments
17 HDW-1: Door 101/A, 102/A, 103/A, 104/A, 105/A, 106/A, 107/A, 110/A, 112/A, 119/A, 124/A, 125/A,
18 126/A, 127/A, 128/A, 130/A, 131/A, 132/A, 133/A, 134/A,136/A, 138/A, 139/A, 144/A
19 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
20 1 EA LOCK SA 7G05
21 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
22 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
23 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
24 NOTE: DOOR 124/A KEYED SEPARATELY
25
26 HDW-2: Door 114/A
27 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
28 1 EA OFFICE LOCK SA 7G05
29 1 EA CLOSER SA 351
30 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
31 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
32 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
33 NOTE: Key lock same as Door 120/A.
34
35 HDW-3: Door 120/A
36 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
37 1 EA OFFICE LOCK SA 10G05
38 1 EA DEADBOLT SA 465
39 1 EA CLOSER SA 351
40 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
41 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
42 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
43 NOTE: Key lock and deadbolt the same. Key both separately from other locks.
44
45 HDW-4: Door 115/A, 116/A, 117/A, 118/A
46 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
47 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK SA 7G37
48 1 EA CLOSER SA 351 Integral stop
49 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
50 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
51
52 HDW-5: Door 121/A
53 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
54 1 EA LOCK SA 10G05
55 1 EA CLOSER SA 351
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00-5
1 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
2 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
3 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
4 NOTE: DOOR 121/A KEYED SEPARATELY
5
6 HDW-6: Door 129/A, 137/A
7 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
8 1 EA LOCK SA 7G04
9 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
10 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
11
12 HDW-7: Door 140/A, 141/A, 142/A, 143/A, 145/A, 146/A
13 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
14 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH SA 7U15
15 1 EA DEADLOCK FA D271
16 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
17 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
18 1 SET SOUND SEALS HA 721S
19
20 HDW-8: Door 112/B, 122/A, 135/A
21 1 EA CYLINDER SA 40 SERIES
22 1 EA SIGN: "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED"
23 Balance of hardware by door supplier or manufacturer.
24
25 HDW-9: Door 109/A
26 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
27 1 EA KEYPAD LOCK SA KP10G77
28 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
29 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
30 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
31
32 HDW-10 Door 108/A
33 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
34 1 EA LOCK SA 7G05
35 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE Compatible with lock
36 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
37 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
38 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
39
40 HDW-11: Door 123/A, 123/B
41 3 EA HINGES MC TA2714
42 1 EA KEYPAD LOCK SA KP10G77
43 1 EA CLOSER SA 351
44 1 EA KICKPLATE HA 193S
45 1 EA WALL STOP HA 234W
46 1 SET SILENCERS GJ 64
47
48
49 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
GLAZING 08 80 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Shop or site installed glass or plastic, and glazing methods.
5
6 REFERENCES
7 Glass Association of North America (GANA) formerly Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): Glazing
8 Manual.
9 IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass
10 Units."
11 American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI Z97.1.
12 Safe Glass Standard: CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
13 Federal Specifications:
14 DD-G-451 D: Glass, Plate, Sheet Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors, and other uses).
15 DD-G-1403B: Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully
16 Tempered).
17 DD-M-00411 b&Am-1: Mirrors, Glass.
18
19 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
20 Watertight and airtight installation or each piece of glass is required unless otherwise shown. Each
21 installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, and impact loading (for operating
22 doors)without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
23 watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
24 Comply with Building Code requirements for maximum allowable air infiltration.
25
26 SUBMITTALS
27 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
28 Product Data:
29 Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and special handling or
30 installation requirements.
31 Provide data on glazing sealant. Identify colors available.
32 Samples:
33 Submit two samples, 12 X 12 inches in size, illustrating glass unit color and design.
34 Certificates:
35 Submit sealed glass unit manufacturer's certificate indicating units meet or exceed specified
36 requirements.
37 •
38 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
39 Schedule glass delivery to coincide with glazing schedules.
40 Original labels, showing manufacturer, quality, and thickness required for each piece of glass except
41 where label must be removed for glass-cutting.
42 Deliver other glazing materials in original containers, manufacturer's original legible labels thereon.
43 Protect against damage and discoloration.
44
45 WARRANTY
46 Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass:
47 Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner as signed by laminated glass manufacturer agreeing to
48 replace laminated glass units that deteriorate within the specified warranty period.
49 Warranty period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
50
51 COORDINATION
52 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
53
54
55
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
GLAZING 08 80 00-2
1
2 PART 2- PRODUCTS
3
4 FLOAT GLASS
5 Manufacturing Standard: Fed. Spec. DD-G-451 D, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1 (clear).
6 Quality: q3-Glazing Select.
7 Thickness: Follow Building Code requirements and Window Schedule on Drawings. Glass thickness
8 designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing
9 Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for
10 various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths required to meet or exceed the
11 following criteria.
12 Manufacturer: Visteon, Pilkington, Oldcastle, Guardian Industries Corporation, PPG Industries, Inc., or
13 accepted substitute.
14
15 TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS
16 Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear) Quality q3, Kind FT.
17 Safety Performance Standard: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16-CFR-1201-C11.
18 Type and Thickness: Follow building code requirements and window schedule on drawings.
19
20 INSULATING GLASS
21 Manufacturing Standard: SIGMA CB, Conform to ASTM E2190.
22 Type: Hermetically sealed units with dehydrated air space, dual sealant,argon gas fill.
23 Coatings: Comply with ASTM C1048, ASTM 01376.
24 Edge Sealant Material: Conform to ASTM E 6-P3.
25 Primary Seal: Polyisobutylene (PIB).
26 Secondary Seal: Silicone.
27 Spacer Material: Aluminum.
28 Glass Layers: 2
29 Air Space Thickness: 1/2 inch.
30 Glazing: Clear float glass.
31
32 LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS
33 Fabricated from two lites of Type I, Class I, quality q3 glass laminated together with a clear polyvinyl
34 buteryl (PVB) interlayer, 0.060 minimum thickness unless otherwise required to satisfy Building Code
35 requirements.
36 Glass Type and Thickness: As specified above and where scheduled.
37 Manufacturing Standard: Comply with ASTM C1172.
38 Provide at Pharmacy 120 windows and elsewhere noted on Drawings.
39
40 MIRROR GLASS
41 Type: Type I, Class 1, Quality q2.
42 Thickness: 3/16 inch thick for sizes less than 10 square feet and 1/4 inch thick for sizes 10 square feet and
43 larger.
44 Silvering: Silver coating with electrolytic copper plating conforming to Fed Spec. DD-M-411.
45 Coating Protection: Two coats clear varnish applied over copper backing and edges.
46 Bottom Channel:
47 "J"channel, extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish.
48 Manufacturer: U.S. Aluminum, model MM250.
49
50 CONVEX MIRRORS
51 Rectangular, 12"X 18"acrylic convex type with hardboard backing and rubber frame; manufactured by
52 Pro-Safe, available from MSC Industrial Supply, Part No. 01219484.
53
54 SLIDING COUNTER WINDOW HARDWARE
55 Mounting: Bottom track recessed in countertop, top track surface mounted.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
GLAZING 08 80 00-3
1 Material: Clear anodized aluminum.
2 Manufacturer and Model: Knape &Vogt"Roll-Ezy".
3 Provide with double channel upper track, recessed mount lower track, shoes,vinyl guides, rubber
4 bumpers and nylon roller presses.
5 Provide with keyed ratchet lock.
6
7 GLAZING GASKETS
8 Type: As specified below and recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use.
9 For Wood and Hollow Steel Work: Butyl tape.
10 For Aluminum Sections: Silicone conforming to ASTMC1115 or EPDM conforming to ASTM C864,
11 extruded bead compatible with the silicone sealant or other recommended by Section manufacturer.
12 For Insulating Glass: Type compatible with edge sealant and recommended by insulating glass fabricator.
13
14 SETTING BLOCKS •
15 Material: Neoprene rubber with 70-90 Shore"A"durometer hardness, and compatible with glazing
16 compound and sealant.
17 Size: Fabricate wider than glass unit thickness and long enough to support glass without excessive
18 pressure on glass edge.
19
20 PART 3 - EXECUTION
21
22 EXAMINATION
23 Verify that openings to be glazed are accurately sized and located, and free of fasteners and other
24 projections which will interfere with glazing.
25 Verify that glazing surfaces are free of moisture, dirt, grease, oil or other deleterious substances.
26 Verify that steel or wood glazing rabbets and any contacting dissimilar materials are painted.
27 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
28 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
29
30 PREPARATION
31 Verify opening dimensions prior to fabrication; allow for glass-edge clearances.
32 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions modify work as required for accurate fit. If
33 measurements differ substantially notify Architect prior to fabrication.
34 Prior to starting work, clean, dry, and remove protective coatings.from glass and surfaces to be glazed.
35
36 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
37 Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
38 materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
39 publications.
40 Allow for glass expansion and contraction.
41 Do not impact glass against framing.
42 Install setting blocks placed at sill quarter points unless identified other by submitted stamped structural
43 calculations.
44 Install glass larger than 5 square feet with setting blocks placed at sill quarter points unless identified other
45 by submitted stamped structural calculations.
46 Install glass surface waves running horizontal.
47 Shift glass with suction cups; do not use pry bar.
48 Clean inside faces of double glazed openings before setting glass in place.
49
50 INSULATING GLASS INSTALLATION
51 Follow glazing specification for sealed insulating glass units, SIGMA No. 70-7-1.
52
53 MIRROR INSTALLATION
54 Install mirrors plumb, level, after finish painting is completed, and with open ventilation space behind.
55 Install with bottom "J" channel secured to wall framing with concealed fittings and tamperproof mountings
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
•
GLAZING 0 08 80 00-4
1 and mastic adhesive elsewhere.
2 Provide mastic in coverage as recommended by manufacturer.
3
4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
5 Remove excess glazing compound from glass and surrounding work.
6 Final glass cleaning specified in Section 01 74 23.
7 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
8 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
9 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
10
11 PROTECTION
12 Protect materials of other trades against damage or discoloration caused by work of this section. •
13 Protect installed glazing against breakage and staining.
14 Cure glazing sealants in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to obtain high
15 early bond strength and surface durability.
16 Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers
17 held away from glass.
18 Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during
19 the construction period, including pieces damaged through natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
20
21 GLAZING SCHEDULE
22 See Window Schedule on Drawings.
23
24
25 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Light gage metal framing, acoustical treatment, gypsum board with paper or vinyl facings, and finishing of
5 board joints.
6
7 REFERENCES
8 Conform to Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board,
9 GA-216-1989, and "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" as modified and
10 supplemented herein.
11 Recommended material and methods are mandatory; those proposed by Contractor as equal or
12 equivalent must be accepted by Architect.
13 Referenced Specifications may be obtained from Gypsum Association, 810 1st Street NE, Suite 510,
14 Washington D.C. 20002; 310 277-8686.
15
16 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
17 Maximum ceiling deflection: 1/360 of span.
18 Maximum deviation from true plane: 1/8 inch per 10 ft. and 1/16 inch in any running foot.
19
20 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
21 Where fire-rated ceilings are noted, construct to obtain specified rating as listed and rated by Underwriter's
22 Laboratories (UL).
23
24 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25 Deliver products to site with manufacturer's original labels intact and legible.
26 Identify fire-rated materials with testing agency label.
27 Protect gypsum materials against damage and discoloration and metal materials against rust.
28 Do not stack gypsum board with long lengths overhanging shorter lengths.
29 Do not overload floor system with stockpiled materials.
30 Indicate adhesive"open time"on adhesive container label.
31
32 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
33 Maintain between 55°F and 75°F for 24 hours before and during work, and for at least 24 hours after
34 materials have dried.
35 Maintain at least 30 ft. candles of illumination measured 3 ft. above floor in work spaces during joint
36 treatment.
37 Maintain sufficient ventilation for proper joint treatment drying.
38
-39 COORDINATION
40 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
41
42 PART 2- PRODUCTS
43
44 STEEL STUDS
45 Material: Steel conforming to ASTM C 645.
46 Metal Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 591.
47 Metal thickness:
48 Adjacent to door jamb: 20 gage.
49 6" and wider studs: 20 gage.
50 Elsewhere: 25 gage.
51 Accessories: Provide as required for complete installation.
52
53 DEFLECTION TRACK
54 Material: Steel conforming to ASTM C 645.
55 Metal Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 591.
56 Type: Slotted deep leg.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-2
1 Metal thickness: 25 gage minimum.
2
3 GYPSUM BOARD
4 Manufacturing Standard: ASTM C 1396.
5 Edges: Tapered
6 Type and Thickness:
7 Interior stud walls and furred ceilings: Standard board, 5/8"thick.
8 Interior ceilings: Gypsum ceiling board, W thick.
9 Restrooms: Water-resistant board, 5/8"thick.
10
11 FASTENERS
12 Screws:
13 Self-tapping, self-drilling, bugle head, ASTM C 626, Type S.
14 Length: 1 5/8 inches
15
16 METAL TRIM
17 Casing Bead:
18 US Gypsum No. 200-A, 200-B, or as noted in drawings, or accepted substitute.
19 Corner Bead:
20 US Gypsum No. 101, or accepted substitute.
21
22 JOINT TAPE
23 ASTM C 475, perforated.
24
25 JOINT COMPOUND
26 ASTM C 475.
27
28 FINISH TEXTURE
29 USG, "Spray Texture," or accepted substitute.
30 Provide at gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint finish.
31
32 ACOUSTIC SEALANT
33 Pecora BA 98, Tremco, Miracle 21, US Gypsum, or accepted substitute.
34 Provide at toilet room perimeter walls and at walls where acoustic insulation is noted on drawings.
35
36 ACOUSTIC INSULATION
37 Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665,Type I.
38 Surface Burning Characteristics:
39 Maximum flame spread: 10 •
40 Maximum smoke developed: 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
41 Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
42 Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1%
43 Thickness: Equal to stud width.
44 Manufacturer: Owens-Corning Sound Attenuation Batts, or accepted substitute.
45
46 WATER RESISTANT SEALANT
47 Silicone with mildew inhibitor conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-S-001543; GE, Dow, or accepted substitute.
48 Clear translucent color.
49
50 OTHER MATERIALS
51 Made or recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
52 Provide all indicated or required for complete installation.
53
54
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-3
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
2
3 EXAMINATION
4 Verify that surfaces to receive gypsum board are accurately located, plumb, square, true, secure, and
5 otherwise properly prepared.
6 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
7 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. •
8
9 STEEL STUD INSTALLATION
10 General:
11 Follow manufacturer's directions.
12 Install plumb, level, true, and in accurate locations indicated.
13 Isolate stud partitions from structure to prevent transfer of loads or movement into partitions.
14 Where stud partitions stop at or slightly above ceiling, brace partition to structure as required to stabilize
15 partition.
16 Form corners and intersection with three studs.
17 Locate studs two inches from internal corners.
18 Frame for openings.
19 Provide partition-height stud adjacent to door frame jambs and secure to jambs.
20 Provide additional partition-height stud approximately 2 inches from each jamb-stud.
21 Provide reinforcing and blocking as required behind wall-mounted door stops, and to support wall-hung
22 loads such as cabinets, railings, toilet room accessories, building equipment, etc. Verify exact locations.
23 Deflection Track:
24 Provide at all full height stud walls attached to overhead roof or floor framing.
25 Attach track to overhead structure.
26 Cut studs 1" to 1 1/2" short.
27 Install studs plumb.
28 Install screws through slot into stud snug-tight, approximately centered in length of slot to allow upward
29 and downward track movement.
30 Do not attach gypsum board to track. Cut gypsum board approximately 1 inch short of full height.
31 Attach gypsum board to studs only.
32
33 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
34 Install board horizontally, and extend to within 1/4 inch of floor.
35 Loosely butt joints.
36 Place tapered edges together, except at angles.
37 Do not place butt ends against tapered edges.
38 Where possible apply boards without butt joints. Where butt joints are necessary, locate as far from
39 ceiling centers as possible and stagger.
40 Support board ends and edges on framing members.
41 Maintain 3/8 inch minimum distance between fastener and board edge.
42 Dimple board surface 1/32 inch with fastener; do not fracture face paper.
43 Secure to framing as follows:
44 Wood Wall Framing: Screw at 8 inches on center along board perimeter and at 12 inches on
45 center at intermediate supports.
46 Wood Ceiling Framing: Screw at 8 inches on center along each support.
47 Metal Wall Framing: Screw at 8 inches on center along board perimeter and 12 inches on center
48 at intermediate supports.
49 Metal Ceiling Framing: Screw at 8 inches on center along each support.
50 Provide gypsum board hood over top of any recessed lighting fixtures which penetrate fire-rated gypsum
51 drywall ceilings. Maintain ceiling fire-resistance rating.
52 At stud walls constructed with deflection track, do not attach gypsum board to deflection track.
53 Attach gypsum board to studs only. Allow for structure deflection without loading gypsum board
54 panels.
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00-4
1 JOINT, CORNER, AND EDGE TREATMENT
2 Application and finishing standard: ASTM C 840.
3 Fill joints and fastener holes in accordance with referenced standards.
4 Conform to GA 216, Level 4, smooth finish.
5 Reinforce inside corners in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
6 Protect external corners and exposed edges with metal trim.
7 Provide control joints, unless otherwise shown on drawings, where and if framing changes direction, and
8 at 30 ft. maximum spacings.
9
10 SEALANT INSTALLATION
11 Acoustic Sealant:
12 Provide sealant around electrical boxes, pipes, etc., located in or passing through sound walls.
13 Prior to installing gypsum board, provide acoustic sealant around sound wall perimeters in angle between
14 wall, floor and ceiling; press board into sealant forming bond between framing member face and back side
15 of board.
16 Provide in joints between sound wall perimeters and other adjacent materials.
17 Permit no voids for sound passage.
18 Water Resistant Sealant:
19 Provide at raw edges and around cutouts in water-resistant gypsum board.
20
21 ACOUSTIC SOUND BLANKET INSTALLATION
22 Install blankets in stud cavities. Friction fit securely between studs. Butt ends of blankets closely together
23 and fill all voids. Cut blankets vertically about 1 inch deep on a centerline between studs before gypsum
24 board panel is installed.
25
26 SURFACE TEXTURE
27 Walls:
28 Spray apply to produce light orange peel finish.
29 Ceilings:
30 Spray apply to produce light orange peel finish.
31 Application:
32 Apply after joints are taped and dry.
33 Follow manufacturer's directions.
34
35 REPAIRS
36 General:
37 After installation and before finishing, correct surface damage and defects.
38 Leave surfaces clean, smooth, and ready for finishing specified in Section 09 90 00.
39 Ridging:
40 Sand ridges smooth without cutting joint tape.
41 Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with compound and finish flush and smooth.
42 Cracks:
43 Fill with compound and finish flush and smooth.
44
45 CLEANING
46 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which
47 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
48 Leave surface ready for finishing specified in other sections.
49 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
50
51 PROTECTION
52 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
53
54
55 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT-10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Commonly used acoustical ceiling systems, consisting of suspension system, grid, and acoustic tiles or
5 boards.
6
7 REFERENCES
8 Acoustic Systems:
9 Type of acoustic materials, types of mounting, noise reduction coefficients, and methods
10 of installation, hereinafter specified, refer to"Ceiling Systems Handbook," published by Ceilings and
11 Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA), 405 Illinois Avenue, Unit 2B, St. Charles, IL 60174;
12 630-584-1919.
13 Suspension Systems:
14 Suspension systems, hereinafter specified, refer to"Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile&
15 Lay-in Panel Ceilings,"ASTM C 635, and to"Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
16 Suspension Systems for Acoustic Tile and Lay-in Panels,"ASTM C 636.
17
18 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
19 Suspension system components fully loaded; maximum deflection: 1/360 of span in accordance with
20 ASTM C 635.
21 Finish surfaces level and true within 1/8 inch per 12 feet.
22 Fire Resistance Classification: ASTM E 119.
23 Flame Spread Classification: ASTM E 84.
24
25 SUBMITTALS
26 Product Data:
27 Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for acoustical materials, suspension
28 system and accessory products required to provide a complete system.
29 Samples:
30 Submit samples of each acoustical material specified including representative grid and metal items.
31 Samples shall show full range of texture and color to be expected in completed work.
32
33 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
34 Deliver in original, unopened, protective packages with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name,
35 pattern, size, thickness, and fire rating legible and intact.
36 Protect against damage and discoloration.
37 Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature.
38
39 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
40 Delay installation of acoustic units until work spaces are dry.
41 Maintain 65% -75% humidity in work spaces 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation.
42 Maintain uniform 55°F -70°F temperature in work spaces 24 hours before, during, and after installation.
43
44 EXTRA MATERIALS
45 Submit one extra case of acoustic tile in unopened protective package. Store in Owner-approved location.
46 COORDINATION
47 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
48
49 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
50
51 ACOUSTIC TILE
52 Type: Fissured mineral fiber tile, square edge.
53 Manufacturers: Armstrong, Celotex, US Gypsum, or accepted substitute.
54 Model (Basis of Design): Armstrong Cortega 769.
55 Size: 24 X 48 inch, 5/8 inch thick.
56 Finish: Factory applied paint.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 00-2
1 Noise Reduction Coefficient on specified mounting: 0.50 minimum.
2
3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
4 Type: Steel, heavy duty rating,exposed grid T-bar system.
5 Manufacturers: Donn, Armstrong, Chicago Metallic, or accepted substitute.
6 Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
7 Color: Match Acoustic Tile.
8 Follow layout shown on Drawings.
9
10 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES •
11 General:
12 Type and sizes recommended by suspension system manufacturer.
13 Seismic Accessories:
14 Beam End Retaining Clip: Armstrong BERC or accepted substitute.
15 Main Runner Seismic Joint Clip: Armstrong MB with ES4 expansion sleeve, or accepted substitute.
16 Grid Intersection Seismic Joint Clip: Armstrong CT, or accepted substitute.
17
18 METAL EDGE TRIM
19 Corrosion-resistant steel, bonderized and enameled to match color of adjacent metal suspension system.
20
21 ACOUSTIC INSULATION
22 Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I.
23 Surface Burning Characteristics:
24 Maximum flame spread: 10
25 Maximum smoke developed: 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
26 Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
27 Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1%
28 Thickness: 31/2 inches minimum..
29 Manufacturer: Owens-Corning Sound Attenuation Batts, or accepted substitute.
30
31 PART 3— EXECUTION
32
33 EXAMINATION
34 Verify that surfaces provided by other trades are clean, dry, dust-free, smooth, level, within 1/8 inch in 12
35 ft. and otherwise properly prepared to receive acoustic treatment.
36 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
37 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
38
39 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
40 Verify prior to fabrication.
41 If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions, modify work as required for accurate fit. If
42 measurements differ substantially notify Architect prior to fabrication.
43
44 INSTALLATION
45 General:
46 Follow standard specifications, manufacturer's directions and layout drawings, except as modified
47 hereunder.
48 • Metal Suspension System:
49 Where mechanical and electrical work interferes with regular spacing of hangers provide additional
50 hangers and channels and make necessary adjustments in ceiling construction.
51 Do not attach or pass hangers through mechanical or electrical ductwork.
52 Provide framing around recessed light fixtures and other openings.
53 Maximum vertical hanger splay: 5 inches per 4 ft.
54 Acoustical Units:
55 Install units in level plane, in straight line courses, and with solid bearing on support members.
56 Minimum border unit width: 1/2 unit dimension, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - 09 51 00-3
1 Install pattern grain, if any, in one direction.
2 Seal joints around pipes, ducts, and other penetrations with sealant specified in Section 07900.
3 Where tile abuts vertical surfaces trim joints with metal edge trim. Attach trim to vertical surface with
4 mechanical fasteners.
5 Acoustic Insulation:
6 Provide between framing members butting joints tight with no voids.
7
8 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
9 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which
10 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
11 Remove debris from project site upon work completion, or sooner, if directed.
12
13 PROTECTION
14 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
15
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Sheet vinyl, resilient tile, and linoleum flooring. Preparation of substrate surfaces. Resilient bases and
5 accessories.
6
7 SUBMITTALS
8 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
9 Samples:
10 Two full size samples of specified floor tile.
11 Two full size samples of specified luxury vinyl tile.
12 One 3 X 6 inch sample of specified sheet vinyl flooring.
13 One 12 inch long sample of each edge strip.
14 One 12 inch wide sample of stair treads.
15 Maintenance Instructions:
16 In accordance with Section 01 33 00, submit manufacturer's recommended maintenance products and
17 methods to General Contractor, for inclusion on Owner's maintenance manual.
18
19 EMISSIONS STANDARDS
20 Conform to the following minimum standards for sealant emissio ns:
21 Adhesive Type . VOC Limits Standard
22 Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
23 VCT Adhesive: 50 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
24 Cove Base Adhesive: 50 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
25 Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesive: 70 g/L SCAQMD Rule#1168
26 Aerosol Adhesives: Green Seal Standard for Commercial Adhesive GS-36 requirements.
27 Provide manufacturer's documentation verifying that adhesives and sealants contain no urea-
28 formaldehyde.
29
30 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31 General:
32 Standards: Meet requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute.
33 Testing: Owner will employ services of an independent testing laboratory for testing moisture content in
34 concrete slabs in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F 1869 Standard Test method for measuring
35 vapor emission rate of concrete subfloor using anhydrous calcium chloride.
36 Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in the installation of resilient flooring products in projects of
37 comparable size and complexity as this project and who is acceptable by the product manufacturer.
38
39 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
40 Deliver in unopened packages, manufacturer's original labels thereon.
41 Matching coverings shall bear manufacturer's run number.
42 Do not remove labels or open packages until Architect inspects.
43 Protect against damage and discoloration.
44 Store in dry place.
45 Maintain storage place temperature above 70°F for immediate 48 hours prior to and during storage.
46
47 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
48 Work Space Air and Surface Temperatures:
49 Not less than 70°F 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after laying.
50 Not lower than 55°F thereafter.
51 Work Space Ventilation:
52 When using offensive odor adhesive provide sufficient ventilation to maintain healthy and pleasant
53 environment for all trades.
54 Work Space Illumination:
55 Do not work under less than 30 foot candles measured 3 ft. above floor.
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-2
1 COORDINATION
2 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
3
4 PART 2- PRODUCTS
5
6 SHEET VINYL
7 Manufacturing Standard: ASTM F 1913, Type II, Class A backing, Grade 2.
8 Manufacturer and Type: Armstrong "Connection Corlon", or accepted substitute.
9 Thickness: ..080"gage.
10 Color: Selected by Owner.
11
12 LUXURY VINYL TILE (LVT)
13 Color: Selected by Owner
14 Allowance: Provide a cash allowance of$2.50 per sq. ft. for purchase of LVT. Include installation cost in
15 base bid.
16
17 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT)
18 Manufacturing Standard: ASTM F1066, Class 2, through pattern.
19 Manufacturer: Azrock.
20 Size: 12 X 12 inch size.
21 Thickness: 1/8 inch.
22 Color: Stonework V-224.
23
24 RUBBER BASE
25 Manufacturer: Johnsonite.
26 Height: 4 inches or 6 inches as scheduled on Drawings.
27 Type: Coved.
28 Provide with factory formed external corners, mitered internal corners and factory-formed end stops.
29 Color: #80 Fawn.
30
31 EDGING STRIPS
32 One inch wide, 1/8 inch thick, rubber base with beveled top.
33 Provide at exposed resilient flooring edges, if any.
34 Match rubber base color.
35
36 PRIMER, SEALER, CRACK FILLER, AND ADHESIVE
37 Water-resistant type, made or approved by covering manufacturer.
38
39 CLEANER
40 Neutral type approved by covering manufacturer.
41
42 FLOOR POLISH
43 Non-slip, non-yellowing type approved by floor covering manufacturer.
44
45 PART 3 - EXECUTION
46
47 EXAMINATION
48 Verify that surfaces to receive work specified herein are solid, dry, clean, level, and otherwise properly
49 prepared.
50 Verify that walls to receive base extend to within 1/4 inch of floor.
51 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
52 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
53
54 PREPARATION
55 Fill concrete slab cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and depressions less than 1/8 inch deep with crack
56 filler. Notify General Contractor to correct wider cracks and deeper depressions.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00-3
1 Provide 1 coat of primer on sanded wood and other surfaces recommended by manufacturer.
2
3 AREAS TO BE COVERED
4 In Spaces Scheduled to have Floor Covering:
5 Also cover closet and alcove floors opening off spaces, if any, with same material.
6 Where Base is scheduled: •
7 Provide around perimeter of room or space, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere.
8 Include casework, free-standing columns, pilasters and other projections, if any.
9 Miscellaneous:
10 Covering not required under permanently built-in casework and equipment, unless otherwise indicated
11 elsewhere.
12
13 INSTALLATION
14 General:
15 Follow manufacturer's instructions and applicable sections of referenced specifications.
16 Vinyl Composition Tile:
17 At least 24 hours before installing, remove tile from shipping cartons and back-stack.
18 Install any tile"grain"with pattern running in only one direction.
19 Install tile in "stack bond"with continuous straight line joints in both directions.
20 Sheet Vinyl Flooring:
21 Install with adhesive over entire floor area to be covered.
22 Edging Strips:
23 Provide wherever covering edges are exposed.
24
25 PATCHING
26 General:
27 Where alterations occur, and where indicated, patch existing covering to remain; match existing material,
28 pattern, and color.
29 Join new covering neatly with existing covering in as good condition as found.
30 At Floor Tile:
31 Patch with full size tile only, unless otherwise approved.
32 Remove existing, less than full size tile, where required to install new full size tile.
33 Base:
34 Patch existing base with 4 ft. minimum length pieces.
35
36 CLEANING, REPAIRING, AND FINISHING
37 After covering and base have set sufficiently, wash with cleaner.
38 After rinsing and drying apply one coat of floor polish to covering. Machine-buff to smooth, dull gloss;
39 hand-buff inaccessible areas.
40 Leave surfaces smooth and defect-free.
41 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
42 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which
43 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
44
45 PROTECTION
46 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
47 Rope off work areas and/or provide necessary coverings to protect work of this section.
48
49
50 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CARPETING 09 68 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Low pile carpet materials including cushions, if any, and accessories.
5
6 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
7 To be eligible to perform work specified herein Contractor must be acceptable to carpet Manufacturer and
8 have successfully completed 2 similar projects.
9
10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
11 Comply with Department of Commerce Flammability Standard DOC FF 1-70.
12 Corridor and exit way carpet shall comply with National Bureau of Standards Radiant Panel Test 75-950.
13
14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
15 Leave with Owner excess pieces of usable carpet over 2 sq. ft. and over 12 inches in least dimension.
16 Store where directed by Owner.
17
18 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
19 Submit to General Contractor in accordance with Section 01 78 23 for inclusion in Owner's maintenance
20 manual 1 copy of Manufacturer's recommendations for care, cleaning, and maintenance of installed carpet.
21 After installation thoroughly instruct Owner in care, cleaning, and maintenance of installed carpet.
22
23 PRODUCT DELIVERY
24 Deliver in original unbroken mill-wrapping, Manufacturer's register number labels thereon.
25 Do not deliver until installation is ready to start.
26 Do not remove labels or open packages until Architect reviews and accepts.
27
28 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
29 Protect against damage and discoloration.
30 Do not store carpet rolls on end.
31
32 WORK SPACE ILLUMINATION
33 Perform no work under less than 30 ft. candles measured 3 ft. above floor.
34
35 MINIMUM AIR AND SURFACE TEMPERATURE
36 Perform no work when conditions exceed manufacturer's specified limits; 50°F minimum.
37
38 COORDINATION
39 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
40
41 WARRANTY
42 Correct defects in materials or workmanship which appear during Warranty Period by repairing and/or
43 replacing and/or re-stretching, if necessary, at no additional cost to Owner. Warrant for 5 years that carpet will
44 maintain specified limits of static electricity generation. 10 year wear warranty against edge ravel and de-
45 lamination.
46
47 PART 2- PRODUCTS
48
49 CARPET
50 Extent of work as noted on Drawings.
51 Manufacturer: Shaw Philadelphia Commercial.
52 Model: Lynchburg 50165.
53 Color: 657454 "Canyon Spice".
54 Minimum construction requirements:
55 Surface Yarn: 87% Olefin, 13% polyester.
56 Yarn Weight: 20 oz./sq. yd.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CARPETING 09 68 00-2
1 Backing: Polypropylene.
2 Static Electricity Control Fiber: Manufacturer's standard type blended with carpet fiber. Maximum
3 Electrostatic Charge: 3.0 kilovolts at 20% relative humidity at 70°F.
4
5 EDGE STRIP
6 One inch wide, thickness to match carpet height, with beveled top.
7 Provide at exposed carpet edges, if any.
8 Color selected by Owner.
9
10 ADHESIVE AND FLOOR FILLER
11 Non-flammable type recommended by carpet Manufacturer.
12 Adhesive for Carpet Tiles: Non-flammable type with anti-microbial protection, VOC content meeting
13 requirements if CRI Green Label Indoor Air Quality Program; "Commercialon Premium Modular Adhesive", or
14 accepted substitute.
15
16 CONCRETE SEALER
17 Type recommended by carpet Manufacturer.
18
19 SEAM CEMENT
20 Non-flammable type recommended by carpet Manufacturer.
21
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23
24 EXAMINATION
25 Verify that subfloor is clean, dry, level, and solid, with no projections or holes that will damage carpet system;
26 that work spaces have specified illumination, humidity, and temperature; and that surfaces are otherwise
27 properly prepared.
28 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
29 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
30
31 PREPARATION
32 Fill cracks less than 1/16 inch wide and depressions less than 1/8 inch deep with filler.
33 Notify General Contractor to correct wider cracks and deeper depressions.
34
35 EDGE STRIP INSTALLATION
36 Follow Manufacturer's directions.
37 Provide edge stripping at exposed carpet edges.
38 Where carpet terminates at door openings, center edge strip under door.
39
40 ADHESIVE APPLICATION
41 Follow Manufacturer's directions.
42 Apply uniformly.
43 Apply only to area that can be covered by carpet within adhesive working-time.
44 Promptly remove spillages.
45
46 CARPET INSTALLATION
47 Follow Manufacturer's directions using direct glue-down method.
48 Run seams and pile inclination in same direction.
49 Match carpet pattern at seams.
50 Lay with minimum possible seams and sections.
51 Fit neatly into breaks and recesses, against bases; around pipes and penetrations; under saddles, ventilator
52 grilles, and thresholds, and around cabinet and equipment perimeters.
53 Sew, tape, and/or cement seams in accordance with carpet Manufacturer's recommendations.
54 Coat cut edges with seam cement.
55 At seams adjacent to doors, center seam directly under door.
56 Do not locate seams in conspicuous locations, near doors to pivot points.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
CARPETING 09 68 00-3
1 Do not install bias-cut seams.
2 Roll carpet to expel air bubbles.
3 Power stretch carpet taut; neatly finish at edges.
4
5 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
6 After all trades have completed with work, vacuum clean carpet.
7 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
8 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have
9 been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
10
11 PROTECTION
12 Protect work specified herein, and work of other trades, against damage and discoloration caused by work of
13 this section.
14 Provide necessary coverings and barricades to protect completed work.
15
16
17
18 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PAINTING& COATING 09 90 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Exterior and interior painting with transparent or opaque finishes. Includes stains, varnishes, lacquers,
5 fillers, and preparation of surfaces.
6
7 SUBMITTALS
8 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
9 Product List:
10 Before ordering, submit complete and detailed list of materials proposed for use.
11 Obtain Architect's acceptance before ordering.
12 Provide product data for field-applied interior paints and coatings which have a potential impact on indoor
13 air, including manufacturer's MSDS sheets or other Product Data listing VOC content as noted below.
14 Provide product data for exterior field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on
15 ambient air quality, including manufacturer's MSDS sheets or other manufacturer's Product Data listing
16 VOC content as noted below.
17 Color Samples:
18 One Sample of each required finish, color, and sheen. Sample size 8 1/2 X 11 inches, minimum.
19 Use suitable substrate for each sample, such as stiff paper for paint and specified wood for stains.
20 Obtain Architect's acceptance before proceeding with work.
21
22 QUALITY ASSURANCE
23 Each product container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indication the following:
24 Manufacturer's Name
25 Type of Material
26 Manufacturer's Product Number
27 Manufacturer's Batch Number
28 Color
29 Instructions for reducing, where applicable.
30
31 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
32 Deliver in original, unopened containers.
33 Do not open containers or remove labels until Architect inspects.
34 _ Store in suitable location where directed by General Contractor.
35 Protect against contamination by foreign matter.
36 Remove unacceptable materials from project site.
37
38 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
39 Follow manufacturer's directions.
40 Minimum ambient air and surface temperature for 24 hours prior to and during application and until film is
41 dry hard thereafter: 40°F.
42 Do not work where dust or insects are present.
43 Do not work where inclement weather may damage surface.
44 Do not work with less than 30 foot candles of available light measured 3 ft. above floor.
45
46 EMISSIONS STANDARDS
47 Conform to the following minimum standards for coating emissions:
48 Coating Type VOC Limits Standard
49 Architectural Flat Paints—Interior 50 g/L Green Seal GS-11
50 Architectural Non-Flat Paints- Interior 150 g/L Green Seal GS-11
51 Primer or Undercoat 150 g/L Green Seal GS-11
52 Anti-Corrosive Coating 250 g/L Green Seal GS-11
53 Clear Wood Finishes - General 350 SCAQMD Rule 1113
54 Clear Wood Finishes —Varnish 350 SCAQMD Rule 1113
55 Clear Wood Finishes —Sanding Sealer 275 SCAQMD Rule 1113
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT— 10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PAINTING& COATING 09 90 00-2
1 Clear Wood Finishes — Lacquer 550 SCAQMD Rule 1113
2 Clear Wood Finishes — Pigmented Lacquer 550 SCAQMD Rule 1113
3 Stains—Interior 250 SCAQMD Rule 1113
4
5 EXTRA STOCK
6 Leave, in previously unopened original containers, one gallon of each top coat.
7 Label for positive identification.
8 Store on project premises where directed.
9
10 COORDINATION
11 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
12
13 PART 2- PRODUCTS
14
15 GENERAL
16 Products for each general purpose shall be of same manufacturer.
17 Do not use products of different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats specified in
18 other sections of these Specifications.
19
20 MATERIALS
21 Select from the following Approved Products Table unless otherwise specified herein.
22 All listed products will not necessarily be employed on this project. Consult painting schedule for required
23 materials.
24 Product numbers are given to establish desired quality and do not indicate color.
25 •
26 COLORS
27 Basis of Design:
28 Interior Walls and Window Frames: Sherwin-Williams SW 6133 Muslin
29 Door Frames and Trim: Sherwin-Williams SW 7040 Smokehouse.
30
31 MIXING AND TINTING
. 32 Deliver paints and enamels ready-mixed to jobsite.
33 Job-mix and job-tint only when acceptable to Architect.
34 Mix only in clean, rust-resistant containers.
35 Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for specific type of surface.
36 Factory-add fungicidal agent to all exterior coatings and to interior coatings applied in any high humidity
37 spaces.
38
39 PART 3 - EXECUTION
40
41 EXAMINATION
42 Examine surfaces to receive coating for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and
43 Work quality.
44 Verify that General Contractor has removed door hardware.
45 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor about defects requiring correction.
•
46 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
47
48 PREPARATION
49 Protection:
50 Cover or otherwise protect work of other trades, including walls and floors of paint storage and mixing
51 rooms.
52. Remove finish hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items. Obtain Architect's
53 approval for protection in lieu of removal.
54 Post signs and install barricades as required to protect work of this section against damage or
55 discoloration.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PAINTING & COATING 09 90 00-3
1 Take extraordinary care to prevent fire. Open cans of paint and varnish only when needed.
2 Keep rubbing cloths and oily rags submersed in water.
3 Surface Preparation:
4 General: Remove any loose material, dirt, or dust.
5 Existing surfaces to be refinished: Clean thoroughly; remove loose, scaly, and other defective film, fill
6 holes and cracks. Remove gloss by washing and sanding; touch-up bare spots with proper type primer.
7 Galvanized Metal: Thoroughly clean with surface conditioner in accordance with manufacturer's
8 instructions.
9 Etch metal with metal conditioner or in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Specification 7.
10 Non-Galvanized Steel: Remove any rust and scale.
11 Wood Doors: Lightly hand block-sand faces and edges with 180 grit sandpaper to remove any raised
12 grain. Remove sanding dust residue.
13 Fill any Voids. At natural finish, color filler to match wood.
14 Other Wood: Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol or approved.
15 Hand block-sand with 180 grit sandpaper to remove any raised grain. Remove sanding dust residue.
16 At opaque coating seal knots, pitch, and resinous sapwood before prime coat application.
17 Fill voids, cracks, and other defects. At natural finish, color filler to match wood.
18
19 COATING APPLICATION
20 General:
21 Follow manufacturer's directions.
22 Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface to be finished is within limitations
23 recommended by paint manufacturer. Test with moisture meter.
24 Apply coating with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment as recommended by coating
25 manufacturer.
26 Do not exceed coating manufacturer's application rate.
27 Follow coating manufacturer's recommended drying time between succeeding coats.
28 Apply finish coats smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps, coating pile-up, and skips.
29 Keep brushes, rollers, and spraying equipment clean, dry, free from contaminates, and suitable for finish
30 required.
31 At rough or resawn wood, back-brush any spray-applied stain.
32 Leave moldings and ornaments clean and true to detail without excessive coating build-up in corners and
33 depressions.
34 Where paint abuts other materials or colors, cut paint edges clean and sharp and with no overlap.
35 Finish door tops, bottoms and edges as specified below: Remove doors from frames, if necessary.
36 Painted Work:
37 Woodwork: Immediately upon jobsite delivery prime woodwork including back-side surfaces.
38 Fill voids, cracks, nail holes and other defects. At natural finish, color filler to match wood.
39 Flat Metalwork except Doors: Apply paint with brush, roller or airless spray equipment.
40 Doors: Apply paint with roller or airless spray equipment only, do not apply with brush.
41 Face runs not permitted.
42 Stained and Natural Work:
43 Adjust finishes where necessary to obtain similar appearance between different adjacent materials.
44
45 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
46 For each required color scheme, request Architect to inspect first finished room, space, or item for color,
47 texture, and workmanship.
48 Dry paint film thicknesses will be measured upon painting completion using Mark II Tooke Coating
49 Inspection Gage, a precision instrument designed for measuring and evaluating paint coatings. Re-coat
50 any Work measuring less than specified thickness.
51
52 CLEANING
53 Remove spills, splatters, and stains from all surfaces including other work and those in paint storage and
54 mixing rooms.
55 Unless otherwise approved, refinish entire wall or surface where portion of finish has been damaged or is
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
PAINTING & COATING 09 90 00-4
1 otherwise unacceptable.
2 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
3 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
4 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
5
6 PAINTING SCHEDULE
7 General:
8 Prime coats specified below may be omitted where factory-applied shop coats are specified in other
9 Sections.
10 Prime coats specified may be omitted from existing finished surfaces, provided existing coating is sound.
11 Number of coats hereunder specified is minimum. Finished work shall be even, uniform color, and free
12 from cloudy and mottled surfaces. Apply additional coats where necessary for any deep tone colors.
13 Minimum coating thicknesses specified below include prime coat and finishing coats combined.
14 Surfaces not coated, unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
15 Items having complete factory finish.
16 Rubber.
17 Non-ferrous metal.
18 Elastomeric sealants.
19 Tempered hardboard.
20 Acoustic tile.
21 Glass.
22 Flooring.
23 Fire-resistance rating labels and instructional labels.
24 Portions of existing buildings where no alterations occur, except as noted on Finish Schedule on
25 Drawings. •
26 Exterior Woodwork:
27 Paint System 8: Latex Enamel.
28 One coat exterior water base primer, 1.4 mils.
29 Two coats exterior latex enamel, 2.6 mils. Match existing paint sheen.
30 Total minimum dry thickness: 4.0 mils.
31 Interior Gypsum Board:
32 Paint System- 15: Latex Enamel
33 One coat wallboard primer, 1.6 mils.
34 Two coats semi-gloss latex enamel, 2.6 mils.
35 Total minimum dry thickness: 4.2 mils.
36 Interior Gypsum Board in Wet Areas:
37 Paint System- 16: Epoxy Enamel
38 One coat water base primer, 1.6 mils.
39 Two coats semi-gloss water-based catalyzed epoxy enamel, 6.0 mils.
40 Total minimum dry thickness: 7.6 mils.
41 Interior Ferrous and Non-ferrous Metal:
42 Paint System— 18: Latex Enamel
43 One coat metal primer, 2.5 mils.
44 Two coats semi-gloss latex enamel, 2.6 mils.
45 Total minimum dry thickness: 5.1 mils.
46 Custom-Built Wood Cabinets, Shelves including Open Shelving, and Tops, Bottoms and all Edges of
47 Cabinet Doors:
48 Paint System-24: Backs and sides against exterior walls and on-grade slabs
49 One coat heavy paint, varnish, or sealer.
50 No surface left without some type of finish.
51 Exposed Mechanical and Electrical Work except in Mechanical or Electrical Equipment Rooms:
52 Paint System-26: Interior metal work:
53 Prepare and paint as specified for other interior metal of same kind.
54 Paint System-27: Electrical conduit, panel boards, and service boxes:
55 Prepare and paint as specified for other interior metal of same kind.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
PAINTING & COATING 09 90 00-5
1
2
3 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT-10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
LOW VOC APPROVED PRODUCTS TABLE
Manufacturers 0-1 Benjamin Glidden Kelly Moore Miller PPG Rodda Sherwin Other
Products ♦I Moore Professional Cloverdale Williams
Concrete Block Filler—water base 285 4000 521 6015 6-7 501901 B25W25
—epoxy 203
Masonry Primer Sealer—water base 066 4000 6040 4-603 505901 A24W300 Sierra-S-30
—epoxy 4015 Griptec
Wood Primer Sealer—water base 023 1020 255 2840 17-921 501601 B42W41
Galvanized Iron Primer—water base PO4 4020 1725 5000 17-921 501601 B66W310
Ferrous Metal Primer—water base C163 4020 1725 5000 90-712 508901 B66W310
—water base epoxy 4030
Heavy-bodied Stain— water base N089 2600 1240 511001 Al 5W10 Olympic-56400A
Exterior Satin Enamel—water base 184 2400 1245 7100 17-921 521101 A82
Exterior Semi-gloss Enamel—water base 170 2416 1250 7200 17-921 542001 A8
Elastomeric Coating—water base 054 2260 1128 8800 4-110 511301 A5
Epoxy Enamel Semi-gloss—water base P43-86 4426 4200 98-1/98-100 70503 B70/B60V25 Sierra-S-16
Enamel Undercoat—water base 253 1020 975 2840 17-955 502001 B28W600
Wallboard Primer—water base 253 1030& 1000 973 6020 6-2 507801 B28W600
Interior Eggshell Enamel—water base 274 1412 2000 3880 6-411 523101 B20W651
Interior Satin Enamel—water base 277 1414 1010 4480 6-3500 532001 A87
Interior Semi-gloss Enamel—water base 276 4206 2020 4580 6-500 542001 B31 W651
Dry Fall—water base 153 1280 F 480 624 6-715 513801 B42W1
1482 ES
1486 SG
Interior Stain—water base 1700 1228 824-20XX Cabot-8220
Urethane Varnish Gloss—water base 422 1808 2096 1221 42324
Urethane Varnish Satin—water base 423 1802 2097 1225 42314
Traffic Paint —White P58 4800 1450-100 6015 11-3 7341 TM 2160
—Fast Dry 4810
Traffic Paint—Yellow 4800 1450-131 6040 11-10 7342 TM 2161
—Fast Cure 4810
SIGNAGE 10 14 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Directories, directional items, letters, signs, and plaques of various materials used in establishing identity
5 or communication.
6 •
7 SUBMITTALS
8 Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
9 Shop Drawings:
10 Prior to starting work submit the following for review and acceptance:
11 Layout templates
12 Color samples
13 One completed sign
14 Jobsite layout and mounting of each sign type.
15
16 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
17 Protect against damage and discoloration.
18
19 COORDINATION
20 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
21
22 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23
24 PLASTIC SIGNS
25 Type: Injection-molded plastic, exposed edges beveled, single faced.
26 Thickness: 1/8 inch minimum.
27 Colors: White lettering on black background.
28 Size: Letters and numbers one inch high, plates 2 inches high X 6 inches long; pictograms 6 inches
29 square.
30 Type Style: Optima bold, 1/32" raised pattern with Grade 2 Braille.
31 Location: Restrooms.
32
33 PART 3 -EXECUTION
34
35 EXAMINATION
36 Verify that backing and surfaces to receive signs are complete, clean, dry, secure, and otherwise properly
37 prepared.
38 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor about defects requiring corrections.
39 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
40
41 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
42 Verify prior to fabrication.
43 If field measurements differ slightly from Drawing dimensions modify work as required for accurate fit. If
44 measurements differ substantially notify Architect prior to fabrication.
45
46 INSTALLATION
47 Install plumb, level, square, true, and secure.
48 Attach to wall at latch side of doors unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
49
50 Install with double-stick adhesive tape.
51 Mount signs at maximum 60 inches above floor to centerline of sign. All signs mounted at uniform height.
52
53 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
54 Remove debris from project site upon work completion of sooner, if directed.
55 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which
56 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
SIGNAGE 1014 00-2
1 PROTECTION
2 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
3
4
5
6 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD,TIGARD, OREGON
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Prefabricated items for use in conjunction with toilets and baths.
5
6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
7 Protect against damage and discoloration.
8 Do not remove protective covers until final project clean-up.
9 Deliver keys to Architect.
10
11 COORDINATION
12 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
13
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15
16 TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS
17 Type: Surface mount, double roll type.
18 Material: Stainless steel.
19 Provide one at each toilet where shown on drawings.
20 Manufacturer: Bobrick B-7686, or accepted substitute.
21
22 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER
23 Type: Surface mount, equipped to dispense single-fold or multi fold towels.
24 Material: Stainless steel.
25 Manufacturer: Bobrick B-262, or accepted substitute.
26 Provide in toilet rooms and at each sink where shown on Drawings.
27
28 TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER
29 Type: Surface mount, equipped to dispense single-fold or half-fold toilet seat covers.
30 Material: Stainless steel.
31 Manufacturer: Bobrick B-221, or accepted substitute.
32 Provide in toilet rooms where shown on Drawings.
33
34 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSERS
35 Type: Surface mount with corrosion resistant valve, 40 fl. oz. reservoir.
36 Material: Stainless steel.
37 Manufacturer: Bobrick B-2112, or accepted substitute.
38 Provide one at each sink or lavatory.
39
40 GRAB BARS
41 Material: Satin finish stainless steel.
42 Mounting: 1 1/2 inch clearance between bar and wall; mount as shown on Drawings.
43 Manufacturer: Bobrick B-6106, or accepted substitute.
44 Provide in toilet compartments intended for handicapped users as shown on the Drawings.
45
46 BLOCKING AND BACKING
47 Provide all necessary.
48 Accessories are located on Drawings for Contractor's convenience.
49 Verify location, type, and quantity with Owner prior to proceeding with work.
50
51 FABRICATION
52 Fabricate units with welded corners, one piece seamless exposed flanges, and without open miters.
53 Except at coin boxes, key locked units alike.
54
55
56
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13-2
1 PART 3- EXECUTION
2
3 EXAMINATION
4 General:
5 Do not proceed until surfaces to receive accessories are smooth, clean, dry, square, sound, accurately
6 sized and located, and otherwise properly prepared.
7 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
8
9 Verification of Conditions:
10 Verify type of wall construction prior to ordering. Provide all required fasteners, clamps, adapters, etc.,
11 necessary for conditions encountered.
12
13 INSTALLATION
14 Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's directions where indicated, or directed.
15 Mount plumb, level, true, and secure with non-corrosive Fasteners.
16
17 ADJUSTMENTS
18 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
19
20 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
21 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
22 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
23 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
24
25 PROTECTION
26 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
27
28
29
30 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
OTHER SPECIALTIES 10 80 00-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Collection of small specialty items not found in independent sections.
5
6 SUBMITTALS
7 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
8 Shop Drawings:
9 Show layout, dimensions, details of construction, methods of joining to other work, required clearances,
10 finishes, accessories, and other pertinent items.
11 Manufacturer's printed data or samples may be substituted, provided required information is included.
12 Approved samples in like-new condition may be used on contract work.
13
14 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
15 Protect against damage and discoloration.
16 Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened, protective wrapping with original, legible label intact.
17
18 COORDINATION
19 Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
20
21 PART 2-PRODUCTS
22
23 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FEC)
24 Type: Recessed, aluminum, trimmed.
25 Door: Clear acrylic plastic convex bubble.
26 Cylinder Lock: Not required.
27 Brackets: Provide with manufacturer's standard brackets to support extinguisher.
28 Painting: Paint cabinet interior with black enamel.
29 Manufacturer and Type: J. L. Industries Clear VU accepted substitute.
30
31 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (FE)
32 Type: OSHA Approved, red, multi-purpose dry chemical.
33 Rating: UL rated 2A-10B:C, 5 lb capacity.
34 Fill and service extinguishers prior to substantial completion of project.
35 Install on wall bracket in fire extinguisher cabinets where cabinets are shown on Drawings.
36
37 CASH DRAWER
38 Type: Under-counter mounted, with two media slots on drawer front and separate removable cash tray.
39 Construction: Heavy-gauge steel with scratch and chip-resistant finish.
40 Security: Locking till cover, removable tray with locking cover.
41 Manufacturer and Model: Steelmaster Touch-Button Cash Drawer, MMF-225-1060-01.
42
43 CHAIR RAIL
44 Type: Rigid vinyl
45 Size: 2"wide, .070"thickness.
46 Retainer: Continuous aluminum, .060"thickness.
47 Anchorage: Sheet metal screws with Alligator achors.
48 Manufacturer and Model: InPro Corporation 2500 Chair Rail, or accepted substitute.
49
50 MOP HOLDER
51 Material: Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish.
52 Holders: Anti-slip with spring-loaded rubber cam, three holders.
53 Manufacturer and Model: Bobrick B-223x24, or accepted substitute.
54
55 BLOCKING AND BACKING
56 Provide where necessary.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
OTHER SPECIALTIES 10 80 00-2
1 Specialties are shown on Drawings for Contractor's convenience; verify location, type and extent of Work
2 before installing blocking and backing.
3
4 PART 3- EXECUTION
5
6 EXAMINATION
7 Verify that surfaces to receive specialties are properly prepared, sized, and located.
8 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring correction.
9 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
10
11 INSTALLATION
12 General:
13 Follow manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
14 Secure plumb, level, square, straight, and true as applicable.
15 Fire Extinguishers:
16 Mount in cabinet as approved by building official.
17
18 ADJUSTMENTS
19 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty period.
20
21 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
22 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
23 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed products which '
24 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
25 Leave installation clean and defect-free.
26
27 a PROTECTION
28 Protect other work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
29
30
31
32 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT—10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
WINDOW BLINDS 12 21 00-1
1 PART 1 - GENERAL •
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Furnishing and installing window blinds and hardware.
5
6 SUBMITTALS
7 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
8 Product Data:
9 For each product specified.
10 Shop Drawings:
11 Show mounting details with appropriate fasteners for specific project substrates.
12
13 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
14 Deliver in Manufacturer's protective container with legible identifying labels intact.
15 Store flat and above ground.
16 Protect against moisture, damage, and discoloration.
17
18 COORDINATION
19 Coordinate with other Trades affecting or affected by Work of this Section.
20
21 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
22
23 WINDOW BLINDS
24 Type: Horizontal, spring tempered, bounce back, solid aluminum slats window covering with valance
25 free exposed headrail.
26 Manufacturer: Levolor, Hunter-Douglas, or accepted substitute. •
27 Model (Basis of Design): Hunter-Douglas CL62.
28 Slats: Nominally 1" wide, .006" thickness with 90% recycled content.
29 Mounting:
30 At hexagonal-shaped exterior windows: Surface-mount above window head. See detail on
31 Drawings.
32 Elsewhere: Inside frame where possible.
33 Controls: Tilt left/Lift right.
34 Included Options: Heavy duty cord, cordlock, cradles, and plastic tapes.
35 Color: 830 Almond.
36 Extent of Work: All exterior windows, all fixed interior windows.
37
38 PART 3 -EXECUTION
39
40 EXAMINATION
41 Verify that surfaces to receive work of this section are solid, true, square, plumb, accurately sized and
42 located, and otherwise properly prepared.
43 Prior to starting work notify General Contractor of defects requiring corrections.
44 Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
45
46 ADJUSTMENTS
47 Adjust moving parts to operate satisfactorily at time of final project acceptance and during warranty
. 48 period.
49
50 PRODUCT CLEANING AND REPAIRING
51 Including work of other sections, clean, repair and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which
52 have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section.
53 Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed.
54
55 PROTECTION
56 Protect other Work against damage and discoloration caused by work of this section.
57
58 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT —10763 SW GREENBURG RD, TIGARD, OREGON
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
5 Thermometers and thermometer wells.
6
7 REFERENCES
8 ASME B40.100- Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical
9 Engineers; 2013.
10 ASTM El -Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers;2014.
11 ASTM E77-Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2007.
12 UL 393-Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current
13 Edition, Including All Revisions.
14
15 SUBMITTALS
16 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
17 Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range,total range and location for manufactured
18 components.
19 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.
20
21 FIELD CONDITIONS
22 Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in,taps,
23 supports and test plugs.
24
25 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
26
27 PRESSURE GAGES
28 Material: Steel conforming to ASTM C 645.
29 Manufacturers:
30 Dwyer Instruments, Inc;www.dwyer-inst.com.
31 Moeller Instrument Co., Inc;www.moellerinstrument.com.
32 Omega Engineering, Inc;www.omega.com.
33 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
34
35 Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass
36 movement, brass socket,with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background.
37 Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
38 Size: 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) diameter.
39 Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
40 Scale: Psi and KPa.
41
42 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
43 Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
44
45 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
46 Manufacturers:
47 Dwyer Instruments, Inc;www.dwyer-inst.com.
48 Omega Engineering, Inc;www.omega.com.
49 Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp;www.wekslerglass.com.
50
51 Thermometers-Adjustable Angle: Red-or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;ASTM El; lens front
52 tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device;
53 adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.
54 Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale.
55 Window: Clear Lexan.
56 Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19-2
1 Calibration: Degrees F.
2
3 PART 3 -EXECUTION
4
5 INSTALLATION
6 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
7 Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.
8 Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level.
9 Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
10 Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
11
12 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Piping insulation.
5 Jackets and accessories.
6
7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 ASTM B209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
9 ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014.
10 ASTM C177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
11 Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.
12 ASTM C195- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved
13 2013).
14 ASTM C449- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
15 Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
16 ASTM C534/C534M-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
17 Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form;2013.
18 ASTM C547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
19 ASTM C552-Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation;2014.
20 ASTM C585- Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
21 Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
22 ASTM C591 -Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
23 Insulation; 2013.
24 ASTM C795- Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
25 Steel;2008 (Reapproved 2013).
26 ASTM D1056- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber;2014.
27 ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.
28 ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
29 UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
30 Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
31
32 SUBMITTALS
33 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
34 Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
35 each service, and locations.
36
37 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
38 Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
39
40 PART 2-PRODUCTS
41
42 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
43 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested
44 in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
45
46 GLASS FIBER
47 Manufacturers:
48 Knauf Insulation; www.knaufusa.com.
49 Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.
50 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
51 Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
52 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
53 Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C).
54 Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
55 Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
56 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 -2
1 Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F(343 degrees C).
2 Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
3 Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor
4 transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches (0.029 ng/Pa s m).
5 Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers.
6
7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
8 Manufacturer:
9 Aeroflex USA, Inc;www.aeroflexusa.com.
10 Armacell LLC; www.armacell.us.
11 K-Flex USA LLC; www.kflexusa.com.
12 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
13 Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M
14 Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
15 Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F (Minus 40 degrees C).
16 Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F(104 degrees C).
17 Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
18 Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation:
19
20 JACKETS
21 PVC Plastic.
22 Manufacturers:
23 Johns Manville Corporation;www.jm.com.
24 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
25 Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
26 Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F (Minus 18 degrees C).
27 Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C).
28 Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch (0.0029 ng/Pa s m), maximum,when tested
29 in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.
30 Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).
31 Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
32 Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
33 Aluminum Jacket:ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M)formed aluminum sheet.
34 Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet.
35 Finish: Smooth.
36 Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.
37 Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm)thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
38 Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm)wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum.
39
40 PART 3 -EXECUTION
41
42 EXAMINATION
43 Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
44 Verify that surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed.
45
46 INSTALLATION
47 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
48 Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
49 Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
50 Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
51 valves, unions,flanges, strainers,flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
52 Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
53 Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing
54 longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch
55 expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 -3
1 Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
2 adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. •
3 For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions
4 at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
5 For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F(60 degrees C), insulate flanges and unions at
6 equipment.
7 Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
8 Provide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure
9 with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with
10 outward clinch expanding staples.
11 Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
12 Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
13 Inserts and Shields:
14 Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches(40 mm) diameter or larger.
15 Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
16 Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
17 Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as
18 adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
19 Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material
20 suitable for the planned temperature range.
21 Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,
22 protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00.
23 Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet(3 meters)above
24 finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
25
26 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -1
1 PART 1 GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
5 Sanitary sewer.
6 Domestic water.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 ANSI Z21.22-American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot
10 Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B (R2004).
11 ANSI Z223.1 -National Fuel Gas Code; 2012.
12 ASME B16.1 -Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; The American
13 Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
14 ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of
15 Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
16 ASME B16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
17 ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
18 Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
19 ASME B16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society
20 of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
21 ASME B16.26-Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes;The American Society of Mechanical
22 Engineers; 2013.
23 ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;2012(ANSI/ASME B31.1).
24 ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014
25 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
26 ASME BPVC-IV- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV- Rules for Construction of Heating
27 Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013:
28 ASSE 1003-Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Distribution Systems;The American
29 Society of Sanitary Engineering;2009.
30 ASTM A53/A53M-Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
31 and Seamless; 2012.
32 ASTM A74-Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2013a.
33 ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
34 Products; 2013.
35 ASTM A234/A234M -Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel
36 for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013.
37 ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal;2008 (Reapproved 2014).
38 ASTM B42-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
39 ASTM B68/668M-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed;2011.
40 ASTM B75/B75M-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube;2011.
41 ASTM B813 -Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper
42 Alloy Tube; 2010.
43 ASTM B828-Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy
44 Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).
45 ASTM C564-Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;2014.
46 .ASTM D1785- Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and
47 120;2012.
48 ASTM D2235-Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
49 Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2011).
50 ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series);
51 2009.
52 ASTM D2564-Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
53 Systems; 2012.
54 ASTM D2665-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,Waste, and Vent Pipe
55 and Fittings; 2014.
56 ASTM D2729- Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -2
1 ASTM D2846/D2846M -Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot-
2 and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2009b.
3 ASTM D2855- Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
4 Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
5 ASTM D3034- Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
6 2014.
7 ASTM F437-Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
8 Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009.
9 ASTM F438-Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
10 Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009.
11 ASTM F439-Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
12 Schedule 80; 2013.
13 ASTM F441/F441M-Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,
14 Schedules 40 and 80; 2013.
15 ASTM F442/F442M -Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
16 (SDR-PR); 2013.
17 ASTM F477-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2010.
18 ASTM F493-Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
19 Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2010.
20 ASTM F708-Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved
21 2008).
22 AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;American Water Works
23 Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).
24 AWWA C550-Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants;American Water Works Association;
25 2013.
26 CISPI 301 -Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm
27 Drain,Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2009.
28 CISPI 310 -Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
29 for Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2011
30 ICC-ES AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
31 ICC-ES AC106 -Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;
32 2012.
33 ICC-ES AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
34 ICC-ES AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
35 MSS SP-58- Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,Application, and
36 Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.;2009.
37 MSS SP-67-Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,
38 Inc.;2011.
39 MSS SP-70-Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization
40 Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
41 MSS SP-80- Bronze Gate, Globe,Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of
42 the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2013.
43 MSS SP-85-Cast Iron Globe &Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
44 Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
45 MSS SP-110-Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
46 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.
47 NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
48 NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects;2014.
49 NSF 372-Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content;2011.
50
51 SUBMITTALS
52 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
53 Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. Provide
54 manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
55 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -3
1
2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3 Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
4 Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
5
6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
7 Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
8 Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
9 Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
10 Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the
11 work, and isolating parts of completed system.
12
13 PART 2-PRODUCTS
14
15 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16 Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux(if used),that comply
17 with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
18
19 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
20 Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
21 Fittings: Cast iron.
22 Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
23
24 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET(1500 mm) OF BUILDING
25 Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
26 Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
27 Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
28
29 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
30 CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M,ASTM F441/F441 M, or ASTM F442/F442M.
31 • Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M,ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439.
32 Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M,solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.
33
34 STORM WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
35 Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
36 Fittings: Cast iron.
37 Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
38
39 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS
40 Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches (80 mm)and Under:
41 Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
42 Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
43 Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch (25 mm):
44 Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed
45 neoprene gaskets.
46 Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
47 Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water
48 impervious isolation barrier.
49
50 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
51 Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
52 If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using
53 MSS SP-58 recommendations.
54 Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
55 Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
56 Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -4
1 Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.
2 Plumbing Piping - Drain,Waste, and Vent:
3 Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm)to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable
4 swivel, split ring.
5 Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm)and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
6 Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.
7 Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm)and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
8 steel clamp.
9 Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier
10 or steel support.
11 Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
12 Plumbing Piping-Water:
13 Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch (15 mm)to 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable
14 swivel, split ring.
15 Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm)and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
16 Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,and
17 concrete pier or steel support.
18 Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
19 locknut, nipple,floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
20 Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable,copper plated.
21 Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
22 Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
23 Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
24 Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
25 Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
26 Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
27 Other Types: As required.
28 Manufacturers:
29 Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.
30 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
31
32 GATE VALVES
33 Manufacturers:
34 Conbraco Industries;www.apollovalves.com.
35 Nibco, Inc;www.nibco.com.
36 Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com.
37 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
38 Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm):
39 MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid
40 wedge disc, solder ends.
41 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger:
42 MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim,outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge
43 disc,flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger
44 mounted over 8 feet(2400 mm) above floor.
45
46 GLOBE VALVES
47 Manufacturers:
48 Conbraco Industries;www.apollovalves.com.
49 Nibco, Inc; www.nibco.com.
50 Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com.
51 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
52 Up To and Including 3 Inches(80 mm):
53 MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends.
54 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -5
1 MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable
2 bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat,flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6
3 inches (150 mm) and larger mounted over 8 feet(2400 mm) above floor.
4
5 BALL VALVES
6 Manufacturers:
7 Conbraco Industries;www.apollovalves.com.
8 Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business: www.grinnell.com.
9 Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc., a Tyco Business;www.shurjoint.com.
10 Nibco, Inc; www.nibco.com.
11 Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com.
12 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
13 Construction, 4 Inches(100 mm)and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi(2760 kPa) CWP,
14 bronze, ductile iron body, 304 stainless steel, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and
15 stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder, threaded, or grooved,
16 ends with union.
17
18 BUTTERFLY VALVES
19 Manufacturers:
20 Grinnell Products, a Tyco Business; B302: www.grinnell.com.
21 Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc., a Tyco Business;www.shurjoint.com.
22 Hammond Valve;www.hammondvalve.com.
23 Crane Co.; www.cranevalve.com.
• 24 Milwaukee Valve Company;www.milwaukeevalve.com.
25 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
26 Construction 1-1/2 Inches (40 mm) and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi (1380 kPa) CWP, cast or ductile iron
27 body, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat,wafer ends, extended neck, 10
28 position lever handle.
29 Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches(150 mm) and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves
30 mounted over 8 feet(2400 mm) above floor.
31
32 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
33 Manufacturers:
34 Amtrol Inc;www.amtrol.com.
35 Cla-Val Co;www.cla-val.com.
36 Watts Regulator Company;www.wattsregulator.com.
37 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
38 Up to 2 Inches (50 mm):
39 ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts,fabric reinforced
40 diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.
41
42 RELIEF VALVES
43 Pressure Relief:
44 Manufacturers:
45 CIa-Val Co; www.cla-val.com.
46 Henry Technologies;www.henrytech.com.
47 Watts Regulator Company;www.wattsregulator.com.
48 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
49 AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body,teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
50 pressure actuated.
51 Temperature and Pressure Relief:
52 Manufacturers:
53 CIa-Val Co; www.cla-val.com.
54 Henry Technologies; www.henrytech.com.
55 Watts Regulator Company;www.wattsregulator.com.
56 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -6
1 AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic,
2 direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F (98.9 degrees C), capacity
3 ASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled.
4
5 STRAINERS
6 Manufacturers:
7 Armstrong International, Inc;www.armstronginternational.com.
8 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
9 Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:
10 Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa)CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless
11 steel perforated screen.
12 Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)
13 stainless steel perforated screen.
14 Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm)to 4 inch (100 mm):
15 Class 125,flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
16
17 PART 3 EXECUTION
18
19 EXAMINATION
20 Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
21
22 PREPARATION
23 Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
24 Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
25 Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
26
27 INSTALLATION
28 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
29 Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
30 Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
31 Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space,and not interfere with use of space.
32 Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
33 Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected
34 equipment. Refer to Section 22 05 16.
35 Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and
36 access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19.
37 Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors
38 with Section 08 31 00.
39 Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
40 Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports,and accessories ready for finish painting.
41 Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 16.
42 Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 23.
43 Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
44 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
45 Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
46 Install fuel oil piping to ASME B31.9.
47 Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and
48 flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
49 PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
50 Pipe Hangers and Supports:
51 Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
52 Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
53 Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch(15 mm) space between finished covering and
54 adjacent work.
55 Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm)of each horizontal elbow.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 05 -7
1 Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
2 movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
3 Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
4 horizontal piping.
5 Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
6 trapeze hangers.
7 Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
8 Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,
9 pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
10 Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22
11 05 48.
12 Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
13
14 APPLICATION
15 Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
16 Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
17 Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
18 Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
19 Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.
20 Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
21 Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
22
23 TOLERANCES
24 Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch (10 mm) vertically of location indicated and
25 slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot(1:50) slope.
26 Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot(1:400) and arrange to drain at low points.
27
28 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
29 Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 13 00.
30 Prior to starting work,verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
31
32 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
33 Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for
34 sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for
35 drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
36 Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter
37 with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.
38 Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk
39 enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to
40 concrete wall.
41 Provide 18 gage, 0.0478 inch (1.21 mm) galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6
42 inch (150 mm) above floor and 6 feet(1800 mm) minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 2
43 inches (50 mm) of loose batt insulation stuffing.
44 Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have
45 initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg (1.75 kPa). Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type
46 appliances, sized in accordance with equipment.
47
48 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Roof and floor drains.
5 Cleanouts.
6 Backflow preventers.
7 Water hammer arrestors.
8 Thermostatic mixing valves.
9
10 REFERENCE STANDARDS
11 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;
12 Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
13 ADA Standards-Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Standards for Accessible Design;2010.
14 ASME A112.6.3- Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001
15 (R2007).
16 ASME A112.6.4- Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
17 2003.
18 ASSE 1011 -Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers;American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004
19 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).
20 ASSE 1012- Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent;American Society of Sanitary
21 Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).
22 ASSE 1013-Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection
23 Principle Backflow Preventers;American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011.
24 ASSE 1019-Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type;American
25 Society of Sanitary Engineering;2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
26 NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; 2012.
27 NSF 372-Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content; 2011.
28 PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.
29
30 SUBMITTALS
31 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
32 Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
33 Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions,weights, and placement of openings and holes.
34 •
35 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
36 Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
37
38 PART 2-PRODUCTS
39
40 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
41 Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372
42 for maximum lead content.
43
44 DRAINS
45 Manufacturers:
46 Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model www.jayrsmith.com.
47 Josam Company; Model www.josam.com.
48 Zurn Industries, Inc; Model www.zurn.com.
49 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
50 Roof Drains:
51 Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.
52 Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.
53 Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws.
54 Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral
55 gravel stop.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-2
•
1
2 CLEANOUTS
3 Manufacturers:
4 Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company; Model www.jayrsmith.com.
5 Josam Company; Model www.josam.com.
6 Zurn Industries, Inc; Model www.zurn.com.
7 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
8 Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3):
9 Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly,
10 and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to
11 accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
12 Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4):
13 Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round
14 stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
15 Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas(CO-5): Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack
16 cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
17
18 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
19 Manufacturers:
20 Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
21 Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
22 Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
23 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
24 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
25 ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs;two
26 independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief •
27 valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of
28 diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet;assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four
29 test cocks.
30
31 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES
32 Manufacturers:
33 Conbraco Industries: www.apollovalves.com.
34 Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
35 Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
36 Double Check Valve Assemblies:
37 ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs;two
38 independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.
39
40 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
41 Manufacturers:
42 Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
43 Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
44 Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
45 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
46 Water Hammer Arrestors:
47 Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, precharged
48 suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C)and
49 maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa)working pressure.
50
51 MIXING VALVES
52 Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
53 Manufacturers:
54 ESBE: www.esbe.se/en.
55 Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com.
56 Honeywell Water Controls: http://yourhome.honeywell.com.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 10 06-3
1 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
2 Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral
3 temperature adjustment.
4 Accessories:
5 Check valve on inlets.
6
7 PART 3-EXECUTION
8
9 INSTALLATION
10 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
11 Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
12 graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
13 Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
14 Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic
15 water may occur; on boiler feed water lines,janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation,
16 irrigation systems,flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs.
17 Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
18 Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply
19 piping to lavatories sinks.
20 Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each
21 washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch (20 mm) minimum, and minimum 18 inches
22 (450 mm) long.
23
24 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Compression tanks.
5 Pumps.
6 Circulators.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 ANSI Z21.10.1 -Gas Water Heaters-Volume I-Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings of 75,000 Btu
10 per Hour or Less; 2011.
11 ANSI Z21.10.3-Gas-Fired Water Heaters-Volume III -Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above
12 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous;2014.
13 ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of
14 Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013:
15 ICC (IPC)-International Plumbing Code;2012.
16 UL 174- Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
17 Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
18 UL 778-Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
19 UL 1453-Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters
20 Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
21
22 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
23 Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
24
25 SUBMITTALS
26 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
27 Product Data:
28 Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other
29 equipment and piping.
30 Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.
31 Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system
32 operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
33 Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
34 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
35 Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement
36 part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
37 Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
38 registered with manufacturer.
39
40 QUALITY ASSURANCE
41 Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified by
42 permanently attached label.
43 Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
44 cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of
45 published maximum efficiency curve.
46
47 CERTIFICATIONS
48 Gas Water Heaters: Certified by CSA International to ANSI Z21.10.1 or ANSI Z21.10.3, as applicable.
49 Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453.
50 Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
51 suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
52
53 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
54 Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00 -2
1
2 WARRANTY
3 See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
4 Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
5
6 PART 2-PRODUCTS
7
8 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
9 Existing Products: ELECTRIC WATER HEATER.
10
11 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS
12 Manufacturers:
13 Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com.
14 ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.
15 Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.
16 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
17 Construction: Welded steel,tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1;supplied with
18 National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa),with flexible EPDM
19 diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles.
20 Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; precharge to 12 psig (80 kPa).
21
22 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS
23 Manufacturers:
24 Armstrong Pumps Inc; Model www.armstrongpumps.com.
25 ITT Bell & Gossett; Model www.bellgossett.com.
26 Grundfos.
27 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
28 Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig (860 kPa)working pressure,with stainless steel rotor assembly.
29 Impeller: Bronze.
30 Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.
31 Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
32 Drive: Flexible coupling.
33
34 PART 3-EXECUTION
35
36 INSTALLATION
37 Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and
38 complying with conditions of certification, if any.
39 Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating system.
40 Domestic Water Storage Tanks:
41 Provide steel pipe support, independent of building structural framing members.
42 Clean and flush prior to delivery to site. Seal until pipe connections are made.
43 Pumps:
44 Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve
45 and balancing valve on discharge.
46 Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
47 cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent
48 of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
49
50 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Water closets.
5 Lavatories.
6 Sinks.
7 Service sinks.
8 Electric water coolers.
9
10 REFERENCE STANDARDS
11 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities;
12 Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
13 ADA Standards-Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
14 ASHRAE Std 18-Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-Contained Mechanical
15 Refrigeration;2008.
16 ASME A112.6.1 M -Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use;The American Society of
17 Mechanical Engineers; 1997(Reaffirmed 2002).
18 ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.
19 ASME A112.19.1 - Enamelled Cast Iron and Enamelled Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 2013
20 ASME A112.19.2-Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
21 ASME A112.19.3- Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use); The American
22 Society of Mechanical Engineers;2008 (R2013).
23 ASME A112.19.5-Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals;The American Society of Mechanical
24 Engineers; 2011.
25 ASSE 1070- Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices; 2004.
26 ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.
27 NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; 2012.
28 NSF 372-Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content; 2011.
29
30 SUBMITTALS
31 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
32 Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,trim, and
33 finishes.
34 Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
35 Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and
36 registered with manufacturer.
37 Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
38 See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
39
40 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
41 Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as
42 suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
43
44 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
45 Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
46 Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to
47 protect fixtures and prevent use.
48
49 WARRANTY
50 See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements.
51 Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 -2
1
2 PART 2-PRODUCTS
3
4 GENERAL
5 Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for
6 maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
7 See plumbing fixture schedule on drawings for products, manufacturers, and requirements.
8 Substitutions: See Section 01 6000-Product Requirements.
.9
10 PART 3-EXECUTION
11
12 EXAMINATION
13 Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
14 Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
15 Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories
16 and sinks.
17
18 PREPARATION
19 Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in
20 schedule for particular fixtures.
21
22 INSTALLATION
23 Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
24 Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers, and
25 escutcheons.
26 Install components level and plumb.
27 Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
28 Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place.
29
30 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
31 Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
32 installation.
33
34 ADJUSTING
35 Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
36
37 CLEANING
38 Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
39
40 PROTECTION
41 Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
42 Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
43 Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
44
45 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
5 Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
6
7 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
8 Cash Allowance: See Section 01 21 00 for additional requirements.
9 Allowance includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems.
10
11 REFERENCE STANDARDS
12 AABC MN-1 -AABC National Standards for Total System Balance;Associated Air Balance Council;2002.
13 ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing,Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
14 Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
15 Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2008.
16 NEBB (TAB)- Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National
17 Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition.
18 SMACNA(TAB)-HVAC Systems Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
19 Contractors' National Association; 2002.
20
21 SUBMITTALS
22 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
23 Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval
24 within 30 days after award of Contract.
25 TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed
26 and the specific approach for each system and component.
27 Submit to the Construction Manager.
28 Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
29 Include at least the following in the plan:
30 List of all air flow,water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to
31 be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters,formulas to be
32 used.
33 Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be
34 tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
35 Final test report forms to be used.
36 Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
37 Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing
38 of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
39 Submit to the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting,and
40 balancing.
41 Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
42 Include actual instrument list,with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.
43 Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use
44 that; otherwise,follow ASHRAE Std 111.
45 Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.
46 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and
47 rough setting.
48
49 PART 2-PRODUCTS-NOT USED
50
51 PART 3-EXECUTION
52
53 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
54 Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
55 AABC MN-1,AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
56 NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC • 23 05 93 -2
1 SMACNA(TAB).
2 Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to
3 Substantial Completion of the project.
4 TAB Agency Qualifications:
5 Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.
6 Certified by one of the following:
7 AABC,Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit AABC
8 National Performance Guaranty.
9 NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
10 TABB,The Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management
11 Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.
12 TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.
13
14 EXAMINATION
15 Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
16 conditions:
17 Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
18 Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
19 Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
20 Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.
21 Duct systems are clean of debris.
22 Fans are rotating correctly.
23 Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
24 Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
25 Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
26 Air outlets are installed and connected.
27 Duct system leakage is minimized.
28 Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
29 Service and balance valves are open.
30 Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.
31 Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
32
33 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
34 Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or
35 minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
36 Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space.
37 Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
38 Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
39
40 SCOPE
41 Test, adjust, and balance the following:
42 Electric Water Coolers
43 Plumbing Pumps
44 Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units
45 Fans
46 Air Inlets and Outlets
47
48 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Duct insulation.
5 Insulation jackets.
6
7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 ASTM B209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
9 ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric];2014.
10 ASTM C518- Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
11 Heat Flow Meter Apparatus;2010.
12 ASTM C553- Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
13 Applications; 2013.
14 ASTM C916-Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985 (Reapproved
15 2007).
16 ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
17 Absorbing Material); 2012.
18 ASTM C1290-Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally
19 Insulate HVAC Ducts;2011.
20 ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2014.
21 ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.
22 NFPA 255-Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National
23 Fire Protection Association;2006.
24 SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
25 National Association; 2005.
26 UL 723- Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters
27 Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
28
29 SUBMITTALS
30 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
31 Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
32 each service, and locations.
33
34 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
35 Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including
36 product density and thickness.
37 Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt,water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by
38 storing in original wrapping.
39
40 FIELD CONDITIONS
41 Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and
42 insulation cements.
43 Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
44
45 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
46
47 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
48 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested
49 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
50
51 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
52 Manufacturer:
53 Knauf Insulation;www.knaufusa.com.
54 Johns Manville; www.jm.com.
55 Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.
56 CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 -2
1 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
2 Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
3 'K' ('Ksi')value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F (0.052 at 24 degrees C), when tested in accordance with
4 ASTM C518.
5 Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F (649 degrees C).
6 Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
7 Vapor Barrier Jacket:
8 Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
9 Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch(0.029 ng/Pa s m),when tested in accordance with
10 ASTM E96/E96M.
11 Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
12 Vapor Barrier Tape:
13 Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film,with pressure
14 sensitive rubber based adhesive.
15 Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage, 0.0508 inch diameter(1.29 mm diameter).
16
17 JACKETS
18 Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire
19 retardant lagging adhesive.
20 Lagging Adhesive:
21 Compatible with insulation.
22 Aluminum Jacket:ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
23 Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet.
24 Finish: Smooth.
25 Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.
26 Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
27 Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm)wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum.
28 Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm)wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless steel.
29
30 PART 3 -EXECUTION
31
32 EXAMINATION
33 Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
34 Verify that surfaces are clean,foreign material removed, and dry.
35
36 INSTALLATION
37 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
38 Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
39 Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
40 Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
41 Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
42 Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
43 Insulate entire system including fittings,joints,flanges, fire dampers,flexible connections, and
44 expansion joints.
45 Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
46 Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
47 Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
48
49 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Metal ductwork.
5 Duct cleaning.
6
7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 ASHRAE (FUND)-ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals;2013.
9 ASTM A36/A36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
10 ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
11 Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
12 ASTM A1008/A1008M-Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
13 Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
14 Bake Hardenable; 2013.
15 ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
16 High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength;
17 2014.
18 ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.
19 ICC-ES AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
20 ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;
21 2012.
22 ICC-ES AC193-Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2013.
23 ICC-ES AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.
24 NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning.and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
25 Protection Association; 2012.
26 NFPA 90B-Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire
27 Protection Association;2012.
28 SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
29 National Association; 2005.
30 UL 181 -Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
31 Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
32
33 SUBMITTALS
34 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
35 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting
36 location and type. Show additional fittings used.
37
38 FIELD CONDITIONS
39 Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
40 manufacturers.
41 Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
42
43 PART 2- PRODUCTS
44
45 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
46 Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
47 Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
48 Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
49 Low Pressure Supply(System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized
50 steel.
51 Medium and High Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
52 Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
53 General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00 -2
1
2 MATERIALS
3 Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet,ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with
4 G60/Z180 coating.
5 Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
6 Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and
7 compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
8 VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.
9 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero,when tested
10 in accordance with ASTM E84.
11 Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized;threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
12 continuously threaded.
13 Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
14 Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
15 Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
16 Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
17 Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
18 Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
19 Other Types: As required.
20
21 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
22 Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated.
23 Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
24 Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.
25 Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of
26 perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
27 Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30
28 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
29 Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA(DCS).
30
31 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
32 Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
33 UL labeled.
34 Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor barrier film.
35 Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5 inches WG (175 Pa) negative.
36 Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec).
37 Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F(Minus 28 degrees C to 79 degrees
38 C).
39 Manufacturers:
40 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
41
42 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Air turning devices/extractors.
5 Backdraft dampers-metal.
6 Duct access doors.
7 Duct test holes.
8 Flexible duct connections.
9 Volume control dampers.
10
11 REFERENCE STANDARDS
12 NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire
13 Protection Association;2012.
14 NFPA 92-Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012.
15 NFPA 96-Standard Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2014.
16 SMACNA(DCS)-HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
17 UL 33 -Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current
18 Edition, Including All Revisions.
19 UL 555-Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
20 Revisions.
21 UL 555S-Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters
22 Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
23
24 SUBMITTALS
25 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
26 Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers and duct access
27 doors. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
28 Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
29
30 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31 Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.as
32 suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
33
34 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
35 Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
36
37 PART 2 -PRODUCTS
38
39 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
40 Manufacturers:
41 Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.
42 Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
43 Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
44 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
45 Multi-blade device with blades alignedin short dimension; steel construction;with individually adjustable
46 blades, mounting straps.
47
48 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS- METAL
49 Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches(450 x 450 mm) or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
50 Equipment:Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
51 Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel,with center pivoted
52 blades of maximum 6 inch (150 mm)width,with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-
53 free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to
54 permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 -2
1
2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
3 Manufacturers:
4 Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
5 Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
6 SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com.
7 Ward Industries by Commercial Products Group of Hart&Cooley, Inc: www.wardind.com.
8 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
9 Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated.
10 Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
11
12 DUCT TEST HOLES
13 Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,
14 threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
15
16 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
17 Manufacturers:
18 Carlisle HVAC Products: www.carlislehvac.com.
19 Elgen Manufacturing: www.elgenmfg.com.
20 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements.
21 Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated.
22 Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
23 Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum
24 density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m).
25 Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches (50 mm)wide.
26 Metal: 3 inches (75 mm)wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch (0.61 mm)thick galvanized steel.
27
28 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
29 Manufacturers:
30 Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.
31 Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
32 Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
33 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
34 Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated.
35 Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm).
36 Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch (0.61 mm), minimum.
37 Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch (200 x
38 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with
39 suitable hardware.
40 Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch (1.21 mm), minimum.
41
42 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
43 Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out of ducts during
44 construction.
45 Thickness: 2 mils (0.6 mm).
46 Products:
47 Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Duct Protection Film: www.carlislehvac.com.
48 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
49
50 PART 3-EXECUTION
51
52 PREPARATION
53 Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 -3
1
2 INSTALLATION
3 Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA
4 (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.
5 Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
6 Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic
7 dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for
8 cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200
9 mm) size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 m)
10 for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
11 Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
12 Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated,
13 where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having
14 jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections,
15 corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
16 Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.
17 Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
18 At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately
19 adjacent to the equipment.
20 At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to
21 the equipment; see Section 22 05 48.
22 Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken
23 from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.
24 Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether
25 dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
26
27 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Roof exhausters.
5 Ceiling exhaust fans.
6
7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 AMCA 99-Standards Handbook;Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010.
9 AMCA 204- Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2005.
10 AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating;Air Movement
11 and Control Association International, Inc.;2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
12 AMCA(DIR) -[Directory of)Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program;Air
13 Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
14 http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.
15 AMCA 300- Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans;Air Movement and Control
16 Association International, Inc.;2008.
17 AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;Air Movement and
18 Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
19 UL 705- Power Ventilators; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
20
21 SUBMITTALS
22 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
23 Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point
24 clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and
25 connection requirements.
26 Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
27 Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and
28 wiring diagrams.
29
30 FIELD CONDITIONS
31 Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction.
32
33 PART 2-PRODUCTS
34
35 MANUFACTURERS
36 Greenheck; Model SP Series: www.greenheck.com.
37 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
38
39 POWER VENTILATORS-GENERAL
40 Static and Dynamically Balanced:AMCA 204- Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
41 Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating
42 Seal.
43 Sound Ratings: AMCA 301,tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.
44 Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
45 UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.
46 Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
47 purpose specified and indicated.
48
49 ROOF EXHAUSTERS
50 Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2
51 inch (13 mm) mesh, 0.62 inch (1.6 mm)thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with
52 continuous curb gaskets.
53 Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge
54 pin, nylon bearings, blades linked, and line voltage motor drive, power open, spring return.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 -2
1 Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable
2 pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position;fan shaft with
3 self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.
4
5 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
6 Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing , resilient mounted motor,
7 gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
8 Grille: Molded white plastic.
9
10 PART 3- EXECUTION
11
12 INSTALLATION
13 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
14 Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.
15
16 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Diffusers.
5 Registers/grilles.
6
7 REFERENCE STANDARDS
8 AMCA 500-L-Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating;Air Movement and Control Association
9 International, Inc.; 2012.
10 ASHRAE Std 70- Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;American Society of
11 Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).
12 SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
13
14 SUBMITTALS
15 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
16 Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,
17 finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,
18 location, application, and noise level.
19 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
20
21 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
23
24 PART 2-PRODUCTS
25
26 MANUFACTURERS
27 Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.
28 Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.
29 Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
' 30 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
31 •
32 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
33 Type: Provide square and rectangular, adjustable pattern diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern with
34 sectorizing baffles where indicated.
35 Connections: Rectangular.
36 Frame: Provide as needed for ceiling type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.
37 Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
38 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
39 Accessories: Provide radial opposed blade volume control damper; sectorizing baffle and gaskets for
40 surface mounted diffusers with damper adjustable from diffuser face.
41
42 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
43 Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch (13 x 13 x 13 mm) grid core.
44 Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with baked enamel finish.
45 Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
46 Frame: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) margin with countersunk screw mounting.
47 Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
48 Accessories: Provide integral, gang &face operated opposed blade damper
49
50 PART 3 -EXECUTION
51
52 INSTALLATION
53 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
54 Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
55 architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
56 Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00 -2
1 Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether
2 dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
3 Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 91 23.
4
5 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 74 13 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Packaged roof top unit.
5 Unit controls.
6 Roof mounting curb and base.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 AHRI 210/240-Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
10 Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
11 AHRI 270-Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
12 Institute; 2008.
13 NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire
14 Protection Association; 2012.
15
16 SUBMITTALS
17 See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
18 Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for
19 this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and
20 duct connections.
21 Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies required for
22 this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and
23 duct connections.
24 Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and
25 registered with manufacturer.
26
27 WARRANTY
28 See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
29 Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors.
30
31 PART 2-PRODUCTS
32
33 MANUFACTURERS
34 Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com.
35 Trane Inc:www.trane.com.
36 York by Johnson Controls Inc:www.johnsoncontrols.com.
37 Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00-Product Requirements.
38
39 MANUFACTURED UNITS
40 General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration.
41 Description: Self-contained, packaged,factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame,
42 supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor,
43 condenser coil and condenser fan.
44 Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
45
46 FABRICATION
47 Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, including access panels with screwdriver operated flush cam
48 type fasteners. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage, 0.0478 inch (1.21 mm), with access
49 doors or panels of minimum 20 gage, 0.0359 inch (0.91 mm).
50 Insulation: 1/2 inch (13 mm)thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion.
51 Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel, of welded construction.
52 Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, and rubber isolated
53 hinge mounted motor or direct drive as indicated. Isolate complete fan assembly. Refer to Section 22 05
54 48.
55 Air Filters: 2 inch (50 mm)thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
PACKAGED OUTDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 23 74 13 -2
1 Vibration Isolation Curb: Provide curb transition as required for new unit to existing curb..
2
3 BURNER
4 Gas Burner: Induced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas
5 valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100
6 percent shut-off pilot.
7 Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of
8 gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor, and after air
9 flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open.
10
11 EVAPORATOR COIL
12 Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection.
13 Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons (21 kw) capacity and less, and
14 thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons (26 kw)cooling capacity and
15 larger.
16
17 COMPRESSOR •
18 Provide hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication,
19 crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and
20 discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier.
21
22 CONDENSER COIL
23 Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard.
24 Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection,wired to
25 operate with compressor.
26
27 MIXED AIR CASING
28 Dampers: Provide outside, return, and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to
29 automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper to fall to closed position. Relief dampers may
30 be gravity balanced.
31 Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on
32 call for heating and above 75 degrees F(24 degrees C)ambient, or when ambient air temperature
33 exceeds return air temperature.
34
35 OPERATING CONTROLS-SINGLE ZONE UNITS
36 Electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat, located as indicated.
37
38 PART 3-EXECUTION
39
40 EXAMINATION
41 Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
42 Verify that proper power supply is available.
43
44 INSTALLATION
45 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with NFPA 90A.
46 Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and
47 utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.
48
49 SYSTEM STARTUP
50 Prepare and start equipment. Adjust for proper operation.
51
52 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
53 Demonstrate operation to Owner's maintenance personnel.
54
55 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100 TIGARD, OREGON
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Single conductor building wire.
5 Metal-clad cable.
6 Wiring connectors.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 ASTM B3 -Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.
10 ASTM B8-Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,
11 or Soft; 2011.
12 ASTM B787/B787M-Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper
13 Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).
14 NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
15 Association;2010.
16 NECA 120-Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical
17 Contractors Association; 2012 (NECA/NACMA 102).
18 NEMA WC 70- Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National
19 Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).
20 NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
21 International Electrical Testing Association;2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
22 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
23 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
24 UL 44-Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
25 UL 83-Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
26 UL 486A-486B-Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
27 UL 486C-Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
28 UL 486D-Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
29 UL 1569- Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
30
31 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
32 Coordination:
33 Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections
34 with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for
35 voltage drop.
36 Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations
37 suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
38 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
39 before proceeding with work.
40
41 QUALITY ASSURANCE
42 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
43 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
44 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
45
46 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
47 Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's
48 instructions.
49
50 PART 2-PRODUCTS
51
52 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
53 Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
54 listing.
55 Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted,
56 or required.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 -2
1 Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
2 Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:
3 Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
4 Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to
5 luminaires.
6 Maximum Length: 6 feet(1.8 m).
7 Where concealed in hollow stud walls and above accessible ceilings for branch circuits up
8 to 20 A.
9 Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from
10 first outlet to panelboard.
11 In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:
12 Where exposed to damage.
13 For damp,wet, or corrosive locations.
14
15 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16 Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
17 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
18 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,wiring, connectors,etc.
19 as required for a complete operating system.
20 Comply with NEMA WC 70.
21 Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.
22 Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
23 Conductor Material:
24 Provide copper conductors only.Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.
25 Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
26 Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors
27 complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated.
28 Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
29 Minimum Conductor Size:
30 Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
31 Exceptions:
32 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet(23 m): 10 AWG,for voltage drop.
33 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet(46 m): 8 AWG,for voltage drop.
34 Control Circuits: 14 AWG.
35 Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
36 size requirements specified.
37 Conductor Color Coding:
38 Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction.
39 Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
40 Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
41 Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color
42 coding electrical tape.
43 Color Code:
44 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase,4 Wire System:
45 Phase A: Black.
46 Phase B: Red.
47 Phase C: Blue.
48 Neutral/Grounded: White.
49 Equipment Ground,All Systems: Green.
50 Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Purple.
51
52 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
53 Manufacturers:
54 Copper Building Wire:
55 Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.
56 Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 -3
1 Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
2 Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
3 Conductor Stranding:
4 Feeders and Branch Circuits:
5 Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
6 Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
7. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
8 Insulation:
9 Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2.
10
11 METAL-CLAD CABLE
12 Manufacturers:
13 AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.
14 Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.
15 Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
16 Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in
17 classified firestop systems to be used.
18 Conductor Stranding:
19 Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
20 Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
21 Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
22 Insulation: Type THHN,THHN/THWN, orTHHN/THWN-2.
23 Provide dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor where indicated or required.
24 Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
25 Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.
26
27 WIRING CONNECTORS
28 Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be
29 connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.
30 Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
31 Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.
32 Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
33 connectors.
34 Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
35 Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations
36 designed for terminal lugs.
37 Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
38 mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
39 Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate,
40 provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the
41 rating of the overcurrent protective device.
42 Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection.
43 Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
44 connectors where connectors are required.
45 Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for connections to
46 terminal screws.
47 Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.
48 Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors
49 without stripping insulation.
50 Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
51 Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F (105 degrees C)for standard
52 applications and 302 degrees F (150 degrees C) for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant
53 and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
54 Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
55 Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 -4
1 Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated,with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for
2 connection to be made.
3
4. PART 3 -EXECUTION
5
6 EXAMINATION
7 Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
8 Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
9 Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to
10 accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
11 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
12
13 PREPARATION
14 Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.
15
16 INSTALLATION
17 Circuiting Requirements:
18 Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
19 When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
20 Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
21 Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft(3.0 m) of location shown.
22 Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited
23 circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
24 Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
25 Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated,when branch circuits are shown as
26 separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
27 Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated,sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among
28 single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted.
29 Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
30 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
31 Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
32 Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
33 Installation in Raceway:
34 Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.
35 Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
36 Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum
37 pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
38 Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended
39 by the manufacturer.
40 Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and
41 methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building
42 structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork,or other systems.
43 Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do
44 not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.
45 Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
46 Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
47 Use listed fittings.
48 Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation.
49 Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
50 Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each outlet.
51 Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes,wireways, panelboards and other equipment
52 enclosures.
53 Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside
54 enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
55 Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 -5
1 Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make
2 splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
3 Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting,
4 nicking or damaging conductors.
5 Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
6 Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and
7 other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
8 Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
9 settings.
10 Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and
11 dies.
12 Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors usingmethods suitable for the
13 application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.
14 Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or
15 heat shrink tubing.
16 For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or
17 electrical filler tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.
18 Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape,
19 or heat shrink tubing.
20 For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical
21 tape.
22 For taped connections,follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering
23 of moisture sealing electrical tape.
24 Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
25 Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored
26 insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each
27 termination and at each location conductors are accessible.
28 Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
29 Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
30 methods specified.in Section 07 84 00.
31 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,
32 including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
33 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
34 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements.
35 Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
36 Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2.The insulation resistance test is
37 required for all conductors.The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.
38 Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
39
40 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Grounding and bonding requirements.
5 Conductors for grounding and bonding.
6 Connectors for grounding and bonding.
7 Ground bars.
8
9 REFERENCE STANDARDS
10 IEEE 81 -Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a
11 Ground System; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2012.
12 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
13 Association; 2010.
14 NEMA GR 1 -Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical
15 Manufacturers Association; 2007.
16 NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
17 International Electrical Testing Association;2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
18 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
19 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
20 UL 467-Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
21
22 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
23 Coordination:
24 Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.
25 Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified
26 requirements for concrete-encased electrode.
27 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
28 before proceeding with work.
29 Sequencing:
30 Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.
31
32 SUBMITTALS
33 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and
34 bonding system components.
35 Field quality control test reports.
36 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and
37 connections. •
38
39 QUALITY ASSURANCE
40 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
41
42 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
43 Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
44
45 PART2-PRODUCTS
46
47 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
48 Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
49 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors,
50 conduit, boxes,fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding
51 system.
52 Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
53 size requirements specified.
54 Grounding System Resistance:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 -2
1 Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise
2 approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry
3 conditions.
4 Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according to
5 IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.
6 Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral,
7 and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms,when tested using "point-to-point"
8 methods.
9 Grounding Electrode System:
10 Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form
11 grounding electrode system.
12 Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
13 Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage.
14 Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.
15 Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
16 Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present)
17 water service pipe(s)that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet(3.0 m)at an
18 accessible location not more than 5 feet(1.5 m)from the point of entrance to the building.
19 Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe
20 electrically continuous.
21 Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter
22 without disconnecting jumper.
23 Metal Building or Structure Frame:
24 Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance
25 with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.
26 Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode
27 system resistance.
28 Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common
29 connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70.
30 Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this
31 ground bar.
32 Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches (6 by 50 by 300 mm) unless otherwise indicated or
33 required.
34 Ground Bar Mounting Height: 60 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
35 Service-Supplied System Grounding:
36 For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral
37 (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make
38 connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.
39 For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral(grounded) bus to
40 equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between
41 neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect.
42 Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
43 Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic
44 equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other
45 normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or
46 likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.
47 Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do
48 not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.
49 Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment
50 grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.
51 Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
52 grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
53 Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground
54 bus only. Do not terminate on neutral(grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.
55 Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to
56 accommodate conduit movement.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26--3
1 Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70.This includes, but
2 is not limited to:
3 Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe
4 used as grounding electrode.
5 Metal gas piping.
6 Provide bonding for metal building frame where not used as a grounding electrode.
7 Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:
8 Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure
9 and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA
10 70.
11
12 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
13 General Requirements:
14 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
15 Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
16 Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 05 26:
17 Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
18 Exceptions:
19 Use bare tinned copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with
20 earth.
21 Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
22 Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and
23 items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
24 Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections or compression connectors for
25 underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.
26 Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic
27 welded connections for accessible connections.
28 Ground Bars:
29 Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.
30 Size: As indicated.
31 Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.
32 Manufacturers:
33 Advanced Lightning Technology(ALT): www.altfab.com.
34 Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.
35 Harger Lightning &Grounding: www.harger.com.
36 ThermOweld, a brand of Continental Industries, Inc: www.thermoweld.com.
37
38 PART 3-EXECUTION
39
40 EXAMINATION
41 Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.
42 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
43 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
44
45 INSTALLATION
46 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
47 Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with
48 NECA 1.
49 Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
50 Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting,
51 nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into
52 connector.
53 Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact
54 surfaces.
55 Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be
56 connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 -4
1 Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque
2 settings.
3 Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and
4 dies.
5 Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
6
7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
8 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
9 Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
10 Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
11 Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous
12 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
13 Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified
14 requirements.
15
16 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.
5
6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
7 ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
8 Products; 2013.
9 ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
10 2009.
11 ASTM B633- Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013.
12 MFMA-4- Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004.
13 NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
14 Association; 2010.
15 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
16 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
17
18 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
19 Coordination:
20 Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and
21 components to be installed.
22 Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for
23 installation.
24 Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the
25 installed locations.
26 Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential
27 conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
28 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
29 before proceeding with work.
30 Sequencing:
31 Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully
32 cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.
33
34 SUBMITTALS
35 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut)
36 framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.
37 Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other
38 than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
39
40 QUALITY ASSURANCE
41 Comply with NFPA 70.
42 Comply with applicable building code.
43
44 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
45 Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
46
47 PART 2-PRODUCTS
48
49 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
50 General Requirements:
51 Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors,fasteners,fittings, accessories, and hardware as
52 necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
53 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where
54 applicable.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 -2
1 Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
2 accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported.
3 Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4 Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.
5 Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where
6 installed.
7 Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise
8 indicated.
9 Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel,or
10 approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
11 Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
12 Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
13 A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
14 Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.
15 Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type;steel or malleable iron.
16 Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
17 Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
18 Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and
19 associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.
20 Comply with MFMA-4.
21 Channel Material:
22 Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel,zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.
23 Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.
24 Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
25 Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
26 Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter.
27 Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm)trade size: 1/4 inch (6 mm)diameter.
28 Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm)trade size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) diameter.
29 Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch(10 mm) diameter.
30 Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter.
31 Luminaires: 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter.
32 Anchors and Fasteners:
33 Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener
34 types indicated for the specified applications.
35 Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
36 Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.
37 Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
38 Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
39 Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.
40 Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation
41 Service, LLC (ICC-ES)for compliance with applicable building code.
42
43 PART 3-EXECUTION
44
45 EXAMINATION
46 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
47 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
48 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
49
50 INSTALLATION
51 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
52 Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA
53 1.
54 Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation
55 report conditions of use where applicable.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 -3
1 Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork,or
2 other systems.
3 Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling
4 support system or ceiling grid.
5 Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.
6 Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.
7 Equipment Support and Attachment:
8 Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut)to support
9 equipment as required.
10 Use metal channel(strut)secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud
11 walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
12 Use metal channel (strut)to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to
13 provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
14 Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own
15 weight for support.
16 Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 34.
17 Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 37.
18 Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 51 00.
19 Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 56 00.
20 Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
21 Remove temporary supports.
22 Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where
23 specifically indicated or permitted)with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires in accordance with
24 NFPA 70.
25
26 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
27 Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
28 Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
29 Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
30 Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.
31
32 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
CONDUIT 26 05 34-1
•
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC).
5 Intermediate metal conduit(IMC).
6 Flexible metal conduit(FMC).
7 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit(LFMC).
8 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
9 Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)conduit.
10 Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit(LFNC).
11 Conduit fittings.
12 Accessories.
13
14 REFERENCE STANDARDS
15 ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC); 2005.
16 ANSI C80.3-American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT); 2005.
17 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
18 Association; 2010.
19 NECA 101 -Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors
20 Association; 2013.
21 NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes,and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,and
22 Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1).
23 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
24 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
25 UL 1 -Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
26 UL 6- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
27 UL 360-Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
28 UL 514B-Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
29 UL 797- Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
30
31 SUBMITTALS
32 Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits 2 inch (53 mm)trade size and larger.
33
34 QUALITY ASSURANCE
35 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
36
37 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
38 Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
39
40 PART 2-PRODUCTS
41
42 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
43 Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
44 product listing.
45 Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the
46 specified applications.Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive
47 requirements.Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid
48 metal conduit.
49 Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
50 Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
51 Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
52 Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
53 Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
54 Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
55 Where exposed below 8 feet(2.4 m), except within electrical and communication rooms or
56 closets.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
CONDUIT 26 05 34-2
1 Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2 Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid
3 metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit(IMC).
4 Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
5 Maximum Length: 6 feet(1.8 m).
6 Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
7 Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
8 Damp,Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
9 Maximum Length: 6 feet(1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated.
10 Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
•
11 Transformers.
12 Motors.
13
14 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
15 Provide all conduit,fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.
16 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
17 Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
18 Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size.
19 inch (16 mm)trade size.
20 Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size.
21 Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size.
22 Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size.
23 Underground, Exterior: 3/4 inch (21 mm)trade size.
24 Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum
25 size requirements specified.
26
27 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
28 Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and
29 listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
30 Fittings:
31 Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as
32 complying with UL 514B.
33 Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
34 Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
35 compression (gland)type fittings are not permitted.
36
37 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
38 Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as
39 complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
40 Fittings:
41 Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
42 514B.
43 Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
44 Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
45
46 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
47 Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC)jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed
48 and labeled as complying with UL 360.
49 Fittings:
50 Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
51 514B.
52 Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
53 Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
CONDUIT 26 05 34-3
1
2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
3 Description: NFPA 70,Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed
4 and labeled as complying with UL 797.
5 Fittings:
6 Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL
7 514B.
8 Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
9 Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
10 Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
11
12 ACCESSORIES
13 Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to
14 be installed.
15 Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force (890 N).
16 Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed.
17 Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be
18 installed.
19
20 PART 3-EXECUTION
21
22 EXAMINATION
23 Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
24 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
25 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
26
27 INSTALLATION
•
28 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
29 Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
30 Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
31 Conduit Routing:
32 Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
33 When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.
34 Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
35 Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
36 Electrical rooms.
37 Mechanical equipment rooms.
38 Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible
39 manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building
40 structure and surfaces,following surface contours where practical.
41 Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
42 Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull
43 points.
44 Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet(46 m) between pull points.
45 Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
46 Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing
47 fittings where moisture may collect.
48 Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) between conduits and piping for other
49 systems.
50 Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) between conduits and hot surfaces. This
51 includes, but is not limited to:
52 Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
53 Conduit Support:
54 Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable
55 supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD,SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
CONDUIT 26 05 34-4
1 Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
2 ductwork, or other systems.
3 Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do
4 not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.
5 Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.
6 Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space
7 between conduit and mounting surface.
8 Use metal channel (strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-
9 mounted conduits.
10 Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. .
11 Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut)with accessory
12 conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
13 Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only where
14 approved).
15 Connections and Terminations:
16 Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel
17 conduits prior to making connections.
18 Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece
19 couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
20 Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
21 Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into
22 connectors.
23 Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts
24 for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
25 Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or
26 enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.
27 Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.
28 Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.
29 Penetrations:
30 Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade
31 beams,without approval of Structural Engineer.
32 Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
33 Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves
34 flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
35 Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
36 Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to
37 prevent entry of moisture and gases.
38 Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of
39 membrane.
40 Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs
41 where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations.Where penetrations are necessary,seal
42 as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.
43 Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
44 Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
45 materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
46 Underground Installation:
47 Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13.
48 Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
49 Underground, Exterior: 24 inches (610 mm).
50 Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches (300 mm)to bottom of slab.
51 Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit
52 length for service entrance where not concrete-encased.
53 Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and
54 expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This
55 includes, but is not limited to:
56 Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
CONDUIT 26 05 34 -5
1 Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
2 Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial
3 temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near
4 the penetration to prevent condensation.This includes, but is not limited to:
5 Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
6 Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.
7 Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed
8 by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches (300 mm) at each end.
9 Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
10
11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
12 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
13 Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
14
15 CLEANING
16 Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
17
18 PROTECTION
19 Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry
20 of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.
21
22 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
BOXES 26 05 37 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), including those used as junction and pull
5 boxes.
6 Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic'inches (1,650 cu cm).
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
10 Association; 2010.
11 NECA 130-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors
12 Association; 2010.
13 NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing,and
14 Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1).
15 NEMA OS 1 -Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical
16 Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).
17 NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
18 Manufacturers Association; 2014.
19 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
20 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
21 UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
22 Including All Revisions.
23 UL 50E- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
24 All Revisions.
25 UL 514A- Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
26
27 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
28 Coordination:
29 Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or
30 other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for
31 electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
32 Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements
33 of the actual equipment to be installed.
34 Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,
35 support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
36 Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected
37 conduits,calculated according to NFPA 70.
38 Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork,furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed
39 under other sections or by others.
40 Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
41 Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted
42 boxes where indicated.
43 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
44 before proceeding with work.
45
46 QUALITY ASSURANCE
47 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
48
49 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
50 Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
51
52 PART 2-PRODUCTS
53
54 BOXES
55 General Requirements:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
BOXES 26 05 37 -2
1 Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA
2 70 and product listing.
3 Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system
4 and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
5 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
6 Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable
7 minimum size requirements specified.
8 Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.
9 Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), Including Those Used as Junction and
10 Pull Boxes:
11 Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
12 Use cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required;
13 furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.
14 Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where
15 required.
16 Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
17 Do not use "through-wall"boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
18 Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.
19 Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A;
20 furnish with threaded hubs.
21 Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of
22 load to be supported;furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where
23 required.
24 Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-
25 connected gangable boxes.
26 Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
27 Wiring Devices: 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm)trade size.
28 Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.
29 Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm):
30 Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.
31 NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
32 Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel.
33 Outdoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel.
34 Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm):
35 Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
36 Boxes 6 square feet(0.56 sq m) and Larger: Provide hinged-cover enclosures.
37
38 PART 3 -EXECUTION
39
40 EXAMINATION
41 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
42 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
43
44 INSTALLATION
45 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
46 Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable,
47 NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not
48 indicated.
49 Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
50 NFPA 70.
51 Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
52 Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.
53 Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
54 Box Locations:
55 Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as
56 required where approved by the Architect.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
BOXES 26 05 37 -3
1 Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.
2 Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
3 Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26.
4 Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 10 05.
5 Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
6 Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
7 Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at
8 different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
9 Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6
10 inches (150 mm) horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
11 Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-
12 back; provide minimum 24 inches (610 mm) horizontal separation.
13 Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance
14 will not be reduced.
15 Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide
16 minimum 24 inches (610 mm) separation where wall is constructed with individual
17 noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
18 Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches (0.0103 sq m) or
19 such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches(0.0645 sq m)
20 for any 100 square feet(9.29 sq m)of wall area.
21 Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors,
22 and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with
23 Section 26 05 34.
24 Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by
25 the Architect:
26 Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
27 Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
28 Electrical rooms.
29 Mechanical equipment rooms.
30 Box Supports:
31 Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable
32 supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
33 Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than
34 boxes used for fixture support)supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with
35 NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
36 Install boxes plumb and level.
37 Flush-Mounted Boxes:
38 Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that
39 front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4
40 inch (6 mm) or does not project beyond finished surface.
41 Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated
42 raised cover is flush with finished surface.
43 Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,tile,
44 gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm)at
45 the edge of the box.
46 Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
47 Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices
48 exceeds 300 V.
49 Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and
50 methods specified in Section 07 84 00.
51 Close unused box openings.
52 Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or
53 designated for future use.
54 Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
55 Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
BOXES 26 05 37 -4
1
2 CLEANING
3 Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
4
5 PROTECTION
6 Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for
7 installation of conductors.
8
9 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Electrical identification requirements.
5 Identification nameplates and labels.
6 Wire and cable markers.
7 Voltage markers.
8 Warning signs and labels.
9
10 REFERENCE STANDARDS
11 ANSI Z535.2-American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.
12 ANSI Z535.4-American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
13 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
14 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
15 UL 969-Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
16
17 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
18 Coordination:
19 Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to
20 fabrication of identification products.
21 Sequencing:
22 Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until
23 identification products have been installed.
24 Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
25
26 SUBMITTALS
27 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.
28 Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials,
29 legends, and formats.
30
31 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
33
34 FIELD CONDITIONS
35 Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.
36
37 PART 2-PRODUCTS
38
39 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
40 Identification for Equipment:
41 Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment
42 and associated sections, compartments, and components.
43 Panelboards:
44 Identify ampere rating.
45 Identify voltage and phase.
46 Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of
47 equipment.
48 Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door.
49 Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
50 For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s)
51 served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
52 Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
53 Identify voltage and phase.
54 Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of
55 equipment.
56 Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 -2
1 Emergency System Equipment:
2 Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in
3 accordance with NFPA 70.
4 Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and
5 location of on-site emergency power sources.
6 Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical equipment.
7 Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote
8 disconnecting means.
9 Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire
10 alarm circuits. Identify with text"FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".
11 Identification for Conductors and Cables:
12 Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.
13 Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for
14 grounding electrode conductors.
15 Identification for Raceways:
16 Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system
17 for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet(6.1 m).
18 Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3
19 inches (76 mm)wide.
20 Color Code:
21 Emergency Power System: Red.
22 Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13.
23 Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 05 19.
24 Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify
25 spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.
26 Identification for Boxes:
27 Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system.
28 Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 91 23 and 09 91 13 per
29 the same color code used for raceways.
30 Emergency Power System: Red.
• 31 Fire Alarm System: Red.
32 For exposed boxes in public areas, do not color code.
33 Identification for Devices:
34 Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.
35 Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
36 Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control
37 devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-
38 mounted control devices installed at one location.
39 Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection,where
40 permitted.
41
42 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
43 Identification Nameplates:
44 Materials:
45 Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
46 Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for
47 exterior use.
48 Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive
49 phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm); engraved text.
50 Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch(3 mm)when any dimension is greater
51 than 4 inches(100 mm).
52 Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); engraved or laser-etched
53 text.
54 Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); engraved or laser-
55 etched text.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 -3
1 Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch (25
2 mm) high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.
3 Identification Labels:
4 Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion
5 resistant.
6 Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless
7 otherwise indicated.
8 Format for Equipment Identification:
9 Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm) by 2.5 inches (64 mm).
10 Legend:
11 System designation where applicable:
12 Emergency Power System: Identify with text"EMERGENCY".
13 Fire Alarm System: Identify with text"FIRE ALARM".
14 Equipment designation or other approved description.
15 Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
16 Minimum Text Height:
17 System Designation: 1 inch (25 mm).
18 Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
19 Color:
20 Normal Power System: White text on black background.
21 Emergency Power System: White text on red background.
22 Fire Alarm System: White text on red background.
23 Format for Receptacle Identification:
24 Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).
25 Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
26 Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
27 Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch(5 mm).
28 Color: Black text on clear background.
29 Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification:
30 Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).
31 Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address.
32 Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
33 Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch(5 mm).
34 Color: Red text on white background.
35
36 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
37 Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth,wrap-around self-
38 adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type
39 markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
40 Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.
41 Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
42 Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
43 Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch(3 mm).
44 Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
45
46 VOLTAGE MARKERS
47 Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-
48 around type markers.
49 Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-
50 adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.
51 Minimum Size:
52 Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches (29 by 110 mm).
53 Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.
54 Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches (29 by 110 mm).
55 Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches (13 by 57 mm).
56 Legend:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 -4
1 Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.
2 Markers for System Identification:
3 Emergency Power System: Text"EMERGENCY".
4 Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
5 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
6 Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
7 Warning Signs:
8 Materials:
9 Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
10 Warning Labels:
11 Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive
12 vinyl labels; UV, chemical,water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials
13 recognized to UL 969.
14 Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories
15 recommended by label manufacturer.
16 Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches (51 mm by 102 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
17
18 PART 3 -EXECUTION
19
20 INSTALLATION
21 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
22 Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
23 maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
24 Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
25 Flush-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
26 Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front;also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.
27 Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
28 Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
29 Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
30 Conduits: Legible from the floor.
31 Boxes: Outside face of cover.
32 Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
33 Devices: Outside face of cover.
34 Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
35 Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces
36 using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
37 Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and
38 edges properly sealed.
39 Mark all handwritten text, where permitted,to be neat and legible.
40
41 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
42 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements.
43 Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles,wrinkles, curling or other signs of
44 improper adhesion.
45
46 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -1
1 _PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Occupancy sensors.
5 Outdoor photo controls.
6 Daylighting controls.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
10 Association; 2010.
11 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
12 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
13 UL 773A- Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including All
14 Revisions.
15 UL 1472- Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
16
17 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
18 Coordination:
19 Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork,furniture, equipment, etc.
20 installed under other sections or by others.
21 Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings.
22 Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork,furniture, equipment or other
23 potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others.
24 Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights,and
25 luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping,
26 equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other
27 sections or by others.
28 Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior
29 to proceeding with work.
30 Sequencing:
31 Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
32
33 SUBMITTALS
34 Product Data: Include ratings,configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service
35 condition requirements,and installed features.
36 Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams.
37 Shop Drawings:
38 Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of
39 each occupancy sensor and associated system component.
40 Daylighting Controls: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of
41 each photo sensor and associated system component.
42 Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
43 See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
44 Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices.
45
46 QUALITY ASSURANCE
47 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
48 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
49 with minimum three years documented experience.
50 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
51 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
52
53 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
54 Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
55 manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -2
1
2 PART 2-PRODUCTS
3
4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
6 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware,
7 components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
8
9 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
10 Manufacturers:
11 Hubbell Building Automation, Inc: www.hubbellautomation.com
12 Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com.
13 WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com.
14 Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a
15 single supplier.
16 All Occupancy Sensors:
17 Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable
18 of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level
19 movements, according to published coverage areas,for automatic control of load indicated.
20 Sensor Technology:
21 Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing
22 movement of thermal energy between zones.
23 Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency shifts
24 in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves.
25 Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect
26 occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies.
27 Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type
28 in dual technology units.
29 Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant
30 presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an
31 adjustable turn-off delay time interval.
32 Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activation with
33 settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies.
34 Passive Infrared Lens Field of View: Field customizable by addition of factory masking material,
35 adjustment of integral blinders, or similar means to block motion detection in selected areas.
36 Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable,with time delay settings up to 30 minutes.
37 Sensitivity: Field adjustable.
38 Adaptive Technology: Field selectable;capable of self-adjusting sensitivity and time delay
39 according to conditions.
40 Compatibility(Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low-voltage
41 lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and
42 magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads,with no minimum load requirements.
43 Load Rating for Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors: As required to control the load indicated on
44 the drawings.
45 Isolated Relay for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: SPDT dry contacts, ratings as required for
46 interface with system indicated.
47 Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
48 All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors:
49 Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard
50 wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control
51 capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode.
52 Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit
53 to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the
54 delayed-off time interval.
55 Finish: Color to be selected.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -3
•
1 Passive Infrared (PIR)Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an
2 area of 900 square feet(83.6 sq m).
3 Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
4 All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
5 Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation.
6 Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings,
7 provide low voltage units,for use with separate compatible accessory power packs.
8 Provide field selectable setting for disabling LED motion detector visual indicator.
9 Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic
10 on/off.
11 Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
12 Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
13 Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors:
14 Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet
15 (41.8 sq m) at a mounting height of 9 feet(2.7 m),with a field of view of 360 degrees.
16 Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors:
17 Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible
18 with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads.
19 Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and
20 accessories as required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
21 Input Supply Voltage: 120 V ac unless otherwise indicated.
22
23 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS
24 Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls:
25 Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and field-
26 adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A.
27 Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate.
28 Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide.
29 Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation.
30 Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles (10.8 to 53.8 lux)turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on
31 ratio with delayed turn-off.
32 Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
33 Failure Mode: Fails to the on position.
34 Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
35
36 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS
37 Manufacturers:
38 Hubbell Building Automation, Inc: www.hubbellautomation.com
39 Sensor Switch Inc: www.sensorswitch.com.
40 WattStopper: www.wattstopper.com.
41 System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible control modules and
42 power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of load indicated according to
43 available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors and manual override controls.
44 Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: Low voltage class 2 photo sensor units with output signal
45 proportional to the measured light level and provision for zero or offset based signal.
46 Sensor Type: Filtered silicon photo diode.
47 Sensor Range:
48 Indoor Photo Sensors: 5 to 100 footcandles (53.8 to 1,080 lx).
49 Atrium Photo Sensors: 200 to 2,500 footcandles (2150 to 2,6910 lx).
50 Skylight Photo Sensors: 1,000 to 6,000 footcandles (10,760 to 64,580 lx).
51 Open Loop Photo Sensors: 3 to 6,000 footcandles (32.3 to 64,580 Ix).
52 Finish: White unless otherwise indicated.
53 Dimming Photo Sensors: Photo sensor units with integral controller compatible with specified dimming
54 ballasts,for direct continuous dimming of up to 50 ballasts.
55 Daylighting Control Dimming Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 control unit
56 compatible with specified photo sensors and with specified dimming ballasts, for both continuous dimming
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE '100,TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -4
1 of compatible dimming ballasts and switching of compatible power packs, contactors, or relays in
2 response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings.
3 Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, specified load to be continuously brightened as not
4 enough daylight becomes available and continuously dimmed as enough daylight becomes
5 available.
6 Control Capability: Capable of controlling up to three separately programmable channels,with
7 up to 50 ballasts per channel.
8 Dimming and Fade Rates: Adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.
9 Cut-Off Delay: Selectable and adjustable from 0 to 20 minutes.
10 Power Packs for Low Voltage Daylighting Control Modules:
11 Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible
12 with specified low voltage daylighting control modules for switching of line voltage loads. Provide
13 quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories•
14 as required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
15 Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac.
16 Load Ratings: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings.
17
18 PART 3-EXECUTION
19
20 EXAMINATION
21 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
22 Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
23 sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
24 Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall
25 plates.
26 Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
27 Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to lighting
28 control devices.
29 Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service
30 voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed.
31 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
32
33 PREPARATION
34 Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
35 Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
36
37 INSTALLATION
38 Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable,
39 NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
40 Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of
41 lighting control devices provided under this section.
42 Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
43 Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor.
44 Locate wall switch occupancy sensors on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches (80
45 mm)from edge of door frame.Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain
46 direction prior to proceeding with work.
47 Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
48 Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch
49 circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
50 Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place.
51 Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with
52 Section 26 27 26.
53 Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to
54 mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair
55 or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized
56 wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -5
1 Occupancy Sensor Locations:
2 Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which
3 rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete
4 coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed
5 devices.
6 Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum
7 of 4 feet(1.2 m) from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per
8 manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers.
9 Outdoor Photo Control Locations:
10 Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing
11 photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east,west, or down.
12 Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including
13 light sources controlled by the photo control itself.
14 Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with
15 conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control.
16 Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations:
17 Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which
18 rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for proper control of
19 respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices.
20 Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accurately measure
21 the light level controlled at the designated task location,while minimizing the measured amount
22 of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows or pendant luminaires.
23 Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure
24 the level of daylight coming into the space,while minimizing the measured amount of lighting
25 from artificial sources.
26 Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per
27 manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail
28 prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.
29 Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or
30 above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location.
31 Where indicated, install separate compatible wall switches for manual control interface with lighting
32 control devices or associated power packs.
33 Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off
34 power pack.
35
36 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
37 Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects.
38 Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds
39 where applicable.Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to
40 be included with submittals.
41 Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable.
42 Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays
43 where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals.
44 Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices.
45
46 ADJUSTING
47 Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
48 Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and
49 to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect.
50 Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on
51 passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection.
52 Adjust external sliding shields on outdoor photo controls under optimum lighting conditions to achieve
53 desired turn-on and turn-off activation as indicated or as directed by Architect.
54 Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture, and window
55 treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or as directed by Architect.
56 Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. Readjust controls calibrated prior to
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 -6
1 installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window treatments that do not function properly as
2 determined by Architect.
3
4 CLEANING
5 Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
6 factory finish.
7
8 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
9 Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting
10 control devices.
11 Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional
12 training materials as required.
13 Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of the
14 installed lighting control devices.
15 Location: At project site.
16
17 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Power distribution panelboards.
5 Lighting and appliance panelboards.
6 Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.
7
8 REFERENCE STANDARDS
9 FS W-C-375-Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision
10 E, 2013.
11 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
12 Association; 2010.
13 NECA 407-Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors
14 Association; 2009.
15 NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2014.
16 NEMA PB 1 -Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
17 NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards
18 Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1).
19 NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
20 International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
21 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
22 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
23 UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
24 Including All Revisions.
25 UL 50E- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including
26 All Revisions.
27 UL 67-Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
28 UL 489- Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current
29 Edition, Including All Revisions.
30 UL 943-Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
31
32 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
33 Coordination:
34 Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or
35 other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for
36 electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
37 Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements
38 of the actual equipment to be installed.
39 Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted
40 panelboards where indicated.
41 Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to
42 be installed.
43 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
44 before proceeding with work.
45
46 SUBMITTALS
47 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards,
48 enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.
49 Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon
50 request.
51 Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent
52 protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor
53 terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
54 Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as routine tests.
55 Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed
56 circuiting arrangements.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
PANELBOARDS 26 24 96 -2
1
2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
4 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
5 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
6
7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
8 Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
9 NECA 407.
10 Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
11 plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and traffic.
12 Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard
13 internal components,enclosure, and finish.
14
15 FIELD CONDITIONS
16 Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards:
17 Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F(-5 degrees C) and 104
18 degrees F(40 degrees C).
19
20 PART 2-PRODUCTS
21
22 MANUFACTURERS
23 Eaton Corporation; : www.eaton.com.
24 General Electric Company; : www.geindustrial.com.
25 Schneider Electric; Square D Products; : www.schneider-electric.us.
26 Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same
27 manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a
28 single supplier.
29
30 PANELBOARDS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
31 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
32 Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service
33 conditions:
34 Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet(2,000 m).
35 Ambient Temperature:
36 Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F(-5 degrees C)and 104
37 sdegrees F(40 degrees C).
38 Short Circuit Current Rating:
39 Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current
40 at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
41 Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.
42 Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
43 Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
44 Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated,with a suitable lug for each feeder or
45 branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
46 Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard,with a suitable lug for each
47 feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
48 Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
49 Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
50 Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following
51 installation locations:
52 Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
53 Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
54 Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
55 Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
PANELBOARDS 26 2416 -3
1 Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs,feed-through lugs, gutter taps,or
2 oversized lugs are provided.
3 Fronts:
4 Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
5 Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough
6 opening.
7 Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
8 Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
9 connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
10 Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through lugs or sub-feed
11 lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.
12 Load centers are not acceptable.
13
14 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
15 Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker
16 type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on
17 the drawings.
18 Conductor Terminations:
19 Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
20 Main and Neutral Lug Type: Compression.
21 Bussing:
22 Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
23 Ground Bus Material: Copper.
24 Circuit Breakers:
25 Provide bolt-on type.
26 Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
27 Enclosures:
28 Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
29 Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring
30 gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent
31 protective device handles without exposing live parts.
32 Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
33
34 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
35 Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit
36 breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as
37 indicated on the drawings.
38 Conductor Terminations:
39 Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
40 Main and Neutral Lug Type: Compression.
41 Bussing:
42 Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.
43 Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
44 Ground Bus Material: Copper.
45 Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
46 Enclosures:
47 Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
48 Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring
49 gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent
50 protective device handles without exposing live parts.
51 Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
52
53 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
54 Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -4
1 Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
2 breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where
3 applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
4 Interrupting Capacity:
5 Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit
6 current rating indicated, but not less than:
7 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.
8 Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the
9 short circuit current rating indicated.
10 Conductor Terminations:
11 Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
12 Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
13 Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole,furnish thermal inverse time tripping element
14 for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.
15 Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
16 Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
17 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI)Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943,
18 class A for protection of personnel.
19 Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for
20 protection of equipment.
21 Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits
22 serving fluorescent lighting.
23
24 Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.
25
26 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
27 Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.
28
29 PART 3 -EXECUTION
30
31 EXAMINATION
32 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
33 Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent
34 with the indicated requirements.
35 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
36 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
37
38 INSTALLATION
39 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
40 Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general
41 workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.
42 Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
43 NFPA 70.
44 Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
45 Install panelboards plumb.
46 Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough
47 opening completely covered.
48 Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches
49 does not exceed 79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor or working platform.
50 Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch (27 mm)trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard
51 stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.•
52 Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
53 Install all field-installed branch devices, components,and accessories.
54 Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as
55 required by NFPA 70.
56 Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
PANELBOARDS 26 2416 -5
1 Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing essential
2 loads where indicated.Also provide for the following:
3 Emergency and night lighting circuits.
4 Fire detection and alarm circuits.
5 Communications equipment circuits.
6 Intrusion detection and access control system circuits.
7 Video surveillance system circuits.
8 Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
9
10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
11 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
12 Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
13 Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.
14
15 ADJUSTING
16 Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque
17 settings.
18 Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
19
20 CLEANING
21 Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
22 instructions.
23 Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
24
25 END OF SECTION
k
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON '
EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Electrical connections to equipment.
5
6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
7 NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
8 Association; 1999 (R 2010).
9 NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers
10 Association; 2012.
11 NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
12 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
13
14 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
15 Coordination:
16 Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
17 manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
18 Determine connection locations and requirements.
19 Sequencing:
20 Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.
21 Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.
22
23 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
25 Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
26 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
27 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
28
29 PART 2-PRODUCTS
30
31 MATERIALS
32 Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
33 Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
34 Cord Construction: NFPA 70,Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment
35 grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
36 Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
37 overcurrent protection.
38 Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 18 and in individual equipment sections.
39 Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
40 Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 34.
41 Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19.
42 Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 37.
43
44 PART 3 -EXECUTION
45
46 EXAMINATION
47 Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
48
49 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
50 Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
51 Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with
52 watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
53 Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
54 encountered.
55 Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
56 Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 -2
1 Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment
2 connection boxes.
3 Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring
4 requirements.
5 Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
6 Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring
7 requirements.
8 •
9 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Wall switches.
5 Wall dimmers.
6 Receptacles.
7 Wall plates.
8
9 REFERENCE STANDARDS
10 FS W-C-596-Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G,
11 2001.
12 FS W-S-896-Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal
13 Specification; Revision F, 1999.
14 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
15 Association; 2010.
16 NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers
17 Association; 1999 (R 2010).
18 NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device—Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
19 2012.
20 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
21 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
22 UL 20 -General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
23 UL 498-Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
24 UL 514D-Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
25 UL 943-Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
26
27 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
28 Coordination:
29 Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork,furniture, equipment, etc. installed under
30 other sections or by others.
31 Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual
32 equipment to be installed.
33 Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.
34 Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block,to
35 provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
36 Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior
37 to proceeding with work.
38 Sequencing:
39 Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
40
41 SUBMITTALS
42 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
43 configurations.
44 Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.
45 Operation and Maintenance Data: •
46 Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets.
47 GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing procedures and intervals.
48 Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.
49
50 QUALITY ASSURANCE
51 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
52 Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
53
54 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
55 Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 -2
1
2 PART 2-PRODUCTS
3
4 MANUFACTURERS
5 Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
6 Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
7 Lutron Electronics Company, Inc:www.lutron.com.
8 Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
9 Source Limitations: Where possible, provide products for each type of wiring device produced by.a single
10 manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
11
12 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS •
13 Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. •
14 For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not
15 less than that of the branch circuit.
16 Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed
17 outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
18 Provide GFI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet(1.8 m) of sinks.
19 Provide GFI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
20
21 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
22 Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
23 Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.
24 Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.
25
26 WALL SWITCHES
27 Manufacturers:
28 Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
29 Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
30 Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
31 Wall Switches-General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver
32 alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and
33 where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.
34 Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back
35 wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
36 Standard Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade,20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type
37 switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or
38 four way as indicated on the drawings.
39
40 RECEPTACLES
41 Manufacturers:
42 Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
43 Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
44 Pass& Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
45 Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system, provide
46 accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated.
47 Receptacles-General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6,
48 and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596;types as indicated on the
49 drawings.
50 Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back
51 wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
52 NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
53 Convenience Receptacles:
54 Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R;
55 single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. Provide 5-20R rated receptacles on all
56 dedicated 20A circuits, unless noted otherwise.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 -3
1 Products:
2 Hubbell 5252 Series.
3 GFI Receptacles:
4 GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped
5 condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.
6 Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.
7 Standard GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R.
8
9 WALL PLATES
10 Manufacturers:
11 Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
12 Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
13 Pass&Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.Iegrand.us
14 Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
15 Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring
16 devices.
17 Size: Standard.
18 Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.
19 Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.
20 Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed,thermoplastic,with hinged lockable cover and
21 corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs
22 connected and identified as extra-duty type.
23
24 PART 3-EXECUTION
25
26 EXAMINATION
27 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
28 Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
29 sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
30 Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
31 Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
32 Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring
33 devices.
34 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
35
36 PREPARATION
37 Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
38 Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
39
40 INSTALLATION
41 Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable,
42 NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.
43 Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of wiring
44 devices provided under this section.
45 Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
46 Wall Switches: 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor.
47 Wall Dimmers: 48 inches(1.2 m) above finished floor.
48 Receptacles: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor or 6 inches (150 mm) above
49 counter.
50 Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.
51 Where multiple receptacles,wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and
52 at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.
53 Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches (80 mm)from edge of
54 door frame.Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to
55 proceeding with work.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763:SW GREENBURG ROAD,SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
• WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 -4
1 Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to
2 manufacturer's instructions.
3 Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4 Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices
5 exceeds 300 V.
6 Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long. Do not
7 connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
8 Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to
9 proper torque specified by the manufacturer.Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that
10 do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
11 Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment
12 grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
13 Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
14 Install wall switches with OFF position down.
15 Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted
16 receptacles with grounding pole on left.
17 Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered
18 without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough
19 openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.
20 Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or
21 designated for future use.
22 Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
23
24 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
25 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
26 Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
27 Operate each wall switch and wall dimmer with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
28 Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
29 Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.
30 Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
31
32 ADJUSTING
33 Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
34 Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect.
35
36 CLEANING
37 Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
38 factory finish.
39
40 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Enclosed safety switches.
5
6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
7 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
8 Association; 2010.
9 NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
10 Manufacturers Association; 2014.
11 NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National
12 Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.
13 NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;
14 International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).
15 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
16 Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
17 UL 50- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
18 Including All Revisions.
19 UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,
20 Including All Revisions.
21 UL 98- Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
22
23 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
24 Coordination:
25 Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other
26 potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for
27 electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
28 Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements
29 of the actual equipment to be installed.
30 Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to
31 be installed.
32 Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction
33 before proceeding with work.
34
35 SUBMITTALS
36 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches
37 and other installed components and accessories.
38 Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short
39 circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features
40 and accessories.
41 Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
42
43 QUALITY ASSURANCE
44 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
45 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
46 Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
47
48 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
49 Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy
50 plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and traffic.
51 Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed
52 switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.
53
54 FIELD CONDITIONS
55 Maintain ambient temperature between-22 degrees F (-30 degrees C)and 104 degrees F (40
56 degrees C) during and after installation of enclosed switches.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 -2
1
2 PART 2- PRODUCTS
3
4 MANUFACTURERS
5 Eaton Corporation; : www.eaton.com.
6 General Electric Company; : www.geindustrial.com.
7 Schneider Electric; Square D Products; : www.schneider-electric.us.
8 Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the same
9 manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a
10 single supplier.
11
12 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES
13 Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with
14 UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
15 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
16 Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following
17 service conditions:
18 Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet(2,000 m).
19 Ambient Temperature: Between-22 degrees F(-30 degrees C)and 104 degrees F(40 degrees
20 C).
21 Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.
22 Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
23 Short Circuit Current Rating:
24 Provide enclosed safety switches,when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent
25 protective devices to be installed,with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
26 fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
27 Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.
28 Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
29 Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch,with a suitable lug for
30 terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
31 Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.
32 Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following
33 installation locations:
34 Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability
35 of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
36 Heavy Duty Switches:
37 Comply with NEMA KS 1.
38 Conductor Terminations:
39 Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
40 Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of
41 accepting three padlocks.
42
43 PART 3 -EXECUTION
44
45 EXAMINATION
46 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
47 Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.
48 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.
49 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
50
51 INSTALLATION
52 Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
53 Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.
54 Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
55 and NFPA 70.
56 Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 -3
1 Install enclosed switches plumb.
2 Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed
3 switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches (2000 mm)
4 above the floor or working platform.
5 Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
6
7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
8 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
9 Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
10 Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
11 Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated
12 components.
13
14 ADJUSTING
15 Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque
16 settings.
17
18 CLEANING
19 Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
20 instructions.
21 Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
22
23 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
BATTERY EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 26 33 05 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Emergency power supply.
5.
6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
7 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
8 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
9 NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems; National Fire
10 Protection Association; 2013.
11
12 SUBMITTALS
13 Product Data: Provide catalog and data sheets showing electrical characteristics and connection
14 requirements. Include unit ratings, dimensions, and finishes. Include performance data for batteries.
15 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
16 Maintenance Data: Include battery maintenance and unit testing procedures.
17
18 QUALITY ASSURANCE
19 Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 70.
20 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
21 with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
22 Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
23 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
24 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
25
26 PART 2-PRODUCTS
27
28 MANUFACTURERS
29 Myers Power Products; Illuminator EM Series Model#1-EM-1-S-BA2006:
30 www.myerspowerproducts.com.
31
32 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
33 Description: NFPA 111 Type A, Class 1.5 stored emergency power supply system designed for Level 1
34 applications and consisting of rectifier/charger unit, storage battery, and solid state inverter with static
35 transfer switch, in one or several enclosures.
36
37 RATINGS
38 Input Voltage: 120 volts,60 Hz, single phase.
39 Output Power: 2.2 kW VA at 0.8 power factor.
40 Output Voltage: 120 volts plus 5 percent, single phase.
41 Inverter Output Frequency: 60 Hz plus 1 percent.
42 Efficiency: 90 percent minimum.
43 Maximum Recharge Time: 18 hours following 1.5 hour discharge.
44 Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 10 percent at full resistive load.
45 Battery: Lead calcium, sealed type battery.
46 Accessories: Provisions for remote battery alarm.
47 Cabinet Size: 25"W X 28"H X 11"D
48 Instrumentation and Alarms: NFPA 111.
49 Charger: Dual rate, designed to maintain battery in full-charge condition during normal conditions.
50
51 PART 3 -EXECUTION
52
53 INSTALLATION
54 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
55 Install units plumb and level.
56 Provide interconnection between cabinets.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
BATTERY EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY 26 33 05 -2
1
2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3 See Section 01 40 00-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
4 Verify operation of each unit by simulating outage.
5
6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
7 Demonstrate normal operation of unit.
8
9 END OF SECTION
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREEN BURG ROAD, SUITE 100,TIGARD, OREGON
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 -1
1 PART 1 -GENERAL
2
3 SECTION INCLUDES
4 Interior luminaires.
5 Exit signs.
6 Ballasts and drivers.
7 Lamps.
8 Luminaire accessories.
9
10 REFERENCE STANDARDS
11 ANSI C82.11 -American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts-High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp
12 Ballasts-Supplements; 2011.
13 IES LM-79-Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
14 Products; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2008.
15 IES LM-80-Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources; Illuminating
16 Engineering Society; 2008.
17 NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors
18 Association; 2010.
19 NECA/IESNA 500-Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical
20 Contractors Association; 2006.
21 NECA/IESNA 502-Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors
22 Association; 2006.
23 NEMA LE 4-Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
24 2012.
25 NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted
26 by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
27 NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
28 UL 1598- Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
29 UL 8750- Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including
30 All Revisions.
31
32 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
33 Coordination:
34 Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or
35 by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
36 Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed
37 locations.
38 Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment,
39 diffusers,fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other
40 sections or by others.
41 Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential
42 obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.
43 Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior
44 to proceeding with work.
45
46 SUBMITTALS
47 Shop Drawings:
48 Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the
49 manufacturer.
50 Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.
51 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
52 information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings,finishes, mounting requirements, listings,
53 service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include
54 model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.
55 LED Luminaires:
56 Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 -2
1 Include IES LM-79 test report.
2 Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement
3 parts.
4 Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
5 See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
6 Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated
7 remote components.
8
9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
11 Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally
12 Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
13
14 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION
15 Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting)and
16 manufacturer's written instructions.
17 Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.
18
19 WARRANTY
20 See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
21 Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.
22
23 PART 2-PRODUCTS
24
25 LUMINAIRE TYPES
26 Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
27
28 LUMINAIRES
29 Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
30 Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
31 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
32 Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s)and all sockets, ballasts,
33 reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp
34 and distribute the light.
35 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,wiring, connectors,
36 hardware, supports,trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
37 Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation,and service without any damage,
38 distortion, corrosion,fading, discoloring, etc.
39 Recessed Luminaires:
40 Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
41 Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters.
42 LED Luminaires:
43 Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
44 Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
45 LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance,
46 calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
47 Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated,with all
48 accessories required for joining and aligning.
49
50 EXIT SIGNS
51 All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated;complying with NFPA 101 and
52 all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
53 Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.
54 Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.
55 Accessories:
56 Provide compatible accessory high impact polycarbonate vandal shields where indicated.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD; OREGON
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 -3
1
2 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS
3 Manufacturers:
4 General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
5 Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.
6 Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance: www.advance.philips.com.
7 Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide ballasts produced
8 by a single manufacturer.
9 Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on
10 the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated.
• 11 Dimmable LED Drivers:
12 Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output
13 unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.
14 Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.
15 Wall Dimmers: See Section 26 27 26.
16 Daylighting Controls: See Section 26 09 23.
17
18 ACCESSORIES
19 Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 1/2"size,factory finished to match luminaire or
20 field-painted as directed.
21 Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.
22
23 PART 3-EXECUTION
24
25 EXAMINATION
26 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
27 Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly
28 sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
29 Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
30 Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.
31 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
32
33 PREPARATION
34 Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
35 Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
36
37 INSTALLATION
38 Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of
39 luminaires provided under this section.
40 Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
41 Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general
42 workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
43 Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.
44 Recessed Luminaires:
45 Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.
46 Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of
47 luminaire.
48 Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
49 Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
50 Exit Signs:
51 Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal.
52 lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
53 Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.
54
55 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
56 Inspect each product for damage and defects.
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI -10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 -4
1 Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
2 Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace
3 excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
4
5 ADJUSTING
6 Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by
7 Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
8 Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path
9 as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.
10 Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate
11 egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.
12
13 CLEANING
14 Clean surfaces according to NECA.500 (commercial lighting)and manufacturer's instructions to remove
15 dirt,fingerprints, paint,or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.
16
17 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
18 See Section 01 78 00-Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
19 See Section 01 79 00-Demonstration and Training,for additional requirements.
20 Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or
21 make adjustments as directed.
22 Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed .
23
24 PROTECTION
25 Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
26
27 END OF SECTION
•
CRC HEALTH OFFICE TI-10763 SW GREENBURG ROAD, SUITE 100, TIGARD, OREGON